Home

Installing TERM Professional

1. 1 u acute u umlaut y y umlaut if Local Print Sequences u u u circumflex u u y The DEC VT320 220 emulations use the following sequences 120 Terminal Emulation Reference SCO Console Emulation Description The SCO Console emulation is a full screen 25 line color emulation of the console for SCO UNIX XENIX systems Keyboard Layout Table 6 SCO Console Keyboard Layout SCO Console IBM PC SCO Console Keyboard Keyboard Byte Sequence F1 F12 F1 F 12 E M E X Shift F 1 Shift F 12 Shift F 1 Shift F12 ELY Elj Ctrl F1 Ctrl F12 Ctrl F1 Ctri F12 E k Elv Ctrl Shift 1 Ctrl Shift F 1 E w E Ctrl Shift F 12 Ctrl Shift F12 Keypad 0 Keypad 9 Keypad 0 Keypad 9 0 9 Home Home E H Page Down Page Down E G Delete Delete X7F Shift T ab Shift T ab E Z 121 TinyTERM Emulator Table 6 SCO Console Keyboard Layout Continued SCO Console IBM PC SCO Console Keyboard Keyboard Byte Sequence Ctrl Esc Ctrl Esc x80 Ctrl Enter Ctrl Enter x81 Ctrl H ome Ctrl H ome x82 Ctrl Page Up Ctrl Page Up x83 Ctrl Backspace Ctrl Backspace x84 Ctrl End Ctrl End x85 Ctri Page Down Ctri Page Down x86 Ctrl K eypad Ctrl K eypad x87 Ctrit Keypad Ctrit Keypad x88 Ctrlte Ctrlte x89 Ctri gt Ctrlt gt x8A F1l and F12 Require KEYBOARD EXTBIOS or INT9 under DOS Requires KEYBOARDINT9 under DOS L
2. 3 When dragging something the status bar indicates th a amp dtopping it at the current location Keyboard Mapper Dialog Box Interface The keyboarthapper enables you to map TN 3270 protocol keys to PC keys This mapping is required since the layout of the Protocol keyboard is different from the PC keyboard Your terminal emulator provides you with default mappings for the various keys on your PC keyboard You may want to change these mappings add new mappings or erase existing ones All these can be done easily using the keyboama amp pper The keyboandapper has been provided to enable you to change the default mapping of any key on the PC keyboard You can map any Protocol key to any PC key The Dialog Box has the following components PC Keyboard The PC Keyboard List box contains a list of all the PC keys which are present on your keyboard Each PC key also shows the current mapping if any The mapping type can be one of the following 1 lt Unmapped gt This implies that the PC key is currently unmapped 2 Other This implies that the PC key is mapped to a Protocol key There are three check boxes for each of the three PC key modifiers Ctrl Alt and Shift The PC Keyboard list box changes to reflect the settings of these check boxes Protocol Keyboard The Protocol Keyboard List Box contains a list of the Protocol keys of your Terminal Emulator The steps to map a Protocol key to a PC key areas follows 1 Select th
3. 70 TERM Professional Emulator In the General Settings group the following optiontay be changed Editor This edit field defines how to execute the editor used for editing files Provide a full pathname if itis notin the Windows directory Default is NOTEPAD EXE Logfile Name This edit field contains the name of the default logfile used by the LOG command Number of Colors Click the down arrow to display the options for the number of allowable colors to display For example if your monitor can only support eight colors 8 should be selected Allowable values are 2 8 and 15 colors gives black and white display Language This option will determine how the keyboard entries will be displayed as well as the language in which TERM will be displayed Startup Flags This edit field allows the user to set a number of values using options specified on the command line This option allows you to set default options that are automatically used whenever TERM is invoked A command option is a letter preceded by a dash Multiple options can be concatenated following a single dash For example to omit the startup banner whenever you run TERM without any other options you would enter u The Startup Flags specified in your configuration are ignored if any startup flags are specified on the command line when starting TERM Startup Script If TERM should be connected then run a specfic script after connection the pathname for
4. Code Page Change the selected code page TERM Professional Emulator e Server Change the server settings of a configuration 17 TERM Professional Emulator General The general settings for TERM Professional may be set with this function These items include the startup flags the number of colors to be displayed on the terminal whether or not to display the menu ribbon bar splash and errors Ribbon Bar Controls Ribbon Bar display status When this item is checked the Ribbon Bar is displayed When unchecked the Ribbon Bar is not displayed Action Help 18 Script Command Displays an edit dialog allowing the user to enter any single script command for immediate execution Command File Displays an execute command file dialog allowing the user to select a script command file to run Capture Toggles current capture mode status Macro Bar Toggles current macro bar display status Server M ode Initiates TERM Professional server mode Connect Connects using the settings of the current configuration If already connected the connection will be dropped and then a new connection will be made Disconnect Disconnects the current connection Contents Displays a list of the contents of the TERM Professional Help system TERM Professional will display Windows Help on the selection made from the list Search for Help on Displays an entry dialog Enter keywords in the entry field TERM TERM Professional
5. 239 NFS Client NFS Client Configuring Century NFS Configuring NFS Printers Advanced Topics Troubleshooting Configuring Century NFS What to Know Before Configuring Century NFS The hostname of the machine providing PCNFSD version 2 x service must be known If this information is not known consult with the system administrator Windows 95 Century NFS softwareis installed to Windows 95 as an optional Client Protocol to be used when communicating with networks An icon is not installed in the Century Windows group Prior to using NFS Microsoft s TCP IP must be installed To verify that the TCP IP stack is installed use the following steps 1 Double click on the Network icon in the Windows Control Panel 2 Verify that TCP IP is shown as one of the listed installed network components in Configuration If the TCP IP has not been installed it can be added by clicking on Add then on Protocol then on Add again This process will require the use of the Windows 95 installation media For further details refer to the Microsoft Windows 95 documentation To verify the correct address has been entered in the TCP IP stack follow these steps 193 Century NFS 1 Double click on the Network icon in Windows Control Panel 2 Select the TCP IP Network Component then select Properties 3 ThelP address entered for the PC may be displayed verified and changed if necessary after clicking onthe IP Address tab Fo
6. 3 When dragging something the status bar indicates the result of dropping it at the current location 11 Keyboard Mapper Dialog Box Interface The keyboarthapper enables you to map TN 5250 protocol keys to PC keys This mapping is required since the layout of the Protocol keyboard is different from the PC keyboard Your terminal emulator provides you with default mappings for the various keys on your PC keyboard You may want to change these mappings add new mappings or erase existing ones All these can be done easily using the keyboana pper The keyboandapper has been provided to enable you to change the default mapping of any key on the PC keyboard You can map any Protocol key to any PC key The Dialog Box has the following components PC Keyboard ThePC Keyboard List box contains a list of all the PC keys which are present on your keyboard Each PC key also shows the current mapping if any The mapping type can be one of the following 1 lt Unmapped gt This implies that the PC key is currently unmapped 2 Other This implies that the PC key is mapped to a Protocol key There are three check boxes for each of the three PC key modifiers Ctrl Alt and Shift The PC Keyboard list box changes to reflect the settings of these check boxes Protocol Keyboard The Protocol Keyboard List Box contains a list of the Protocol keys of your Terminal Emulator The steps to map a Protocol key to a PC key areas follows e Select
7. Figure 31 TERM Professional Save Settings Dialog Box Save Settings C NEWRD RELEASE T TPRO DEFAULT TAP Description Test Configuration Etec Cancel F Use current settings as defaull Summary J I Save To ICONect 1CONect Options Icon Group Century Software x Icon File TTPRO EXE Fo oss Nida SS ED TERM BeMoste ly The Description edit field contains the description of the file to be saved This also determines the name of the icon created if any The Use current settings as default checkbox determines whether the default tap file should be affected by this file If checked the current settings will be saved in both the selected configuration file and the default tap file If unchecked only the selected configuration file will be saved TheSave to ICONect checkbox determines whether a new icon should be created for this configuration file If checked an icon will be created for this configuration file If unchecked the file will be saved but no icon will be created The Icon Group list box sets the Program M anager group in which to place the newly created icon The Icon File is the filename containing the icon to assign Click the Browse button to bring up a standard file dialog with which to select the file All icons located within the chosen file are arranged within the icon browser The Summary button brings up a dialog which allows entry of detailed information about th
8. Group Read Allows members of the user group s to view print and copy files the user created on NFS drives Write Allows members of the user group s to modify and delete files the user created on NFS drives 196 NFS Client Exe Allows members of the users group s to execute files the user created on NFS drives Other Read Allowsall other users those other than the user and members of the users group that created the file to view print and copy files the user created on NFS drives Write Allows all other users those other than the user and members of the user s group that created the file to modify and delete files the user created on NFS drives Exe Allows all other users those other than the user and members of the user s group that created the file to execute files the user created on NFS drives Misc Options The miscellaneous options given allow the customization of the NFS system for 2memory cachingand file control Check the boxes in the dialog displayed for each of the options that will be used within the N FS Detailed instructions for each option are given Cache reads Caches data that is read viaNFS A cache improves data throughput by assigning a section of RAM to temporarily store data blocks being transferred into or out of a device NFS determines the size of the cache Cache writes Caches data that is written via NFS Follow symbolic links This option allows the symbolic links for the
9. The configuration and connection settings used by the Dialer can be easily set or changed through the tabs of the M ain Dialer window This section lists the settings that may be changed with each tab To change an existing connection first select the name of the connection to change from the drop down list of the Connection box above the tabs of the M ain Dialer window Settings on the Connection Tab The option is provided to define the connection type set the default connection specify an authorization model including username and password as well as setting up the network Each of the options is described in detail e Connection Type Click on this option to select either a Serial connection or N etwork connection A serial connection is provided for applications that do not use TCP IP The serial connection is currently not used by any Century TCP applications The following are the options available after selecting the N etwork connection PPP Point to Point Protocol Allows hosts to link via TCP IP over an asynchronous RS 232C port PPP offers a more complete set of options than SLIP SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol Allows hosts to link via TCP IP over an asynchronous RS 232C port CSLIP Compressed header SLIP This option is a variant of SLIP that compresses the 40 bytes of TCP IP headers that are transmitted with each data packet down to approximately 5 or 6 bytes 148 Setting up the Dialer e Default Conn
10. Professionalwill automate this process by usinthe dialog string created here TERM ProfessionaWill sequentially Wait For and Then Send the strings entered in these fields e Clear button Clears all values from the fields 3 To accept the new settings pres amp NTER Or click on theOK Button To reject the new settings pressSC Or click on theCancel Button Changing Code Page Settings Code Page Settings determine how the entries from the keyboard will be interpreted and displayed on the screen The Code Page allows higher ASCII characters to be displayed and recognized by the system such as French or Cryllic characters Code Page Setting changes made in this function should be matched with the Code Page Settings in the operating system Windows or DOS Because changes made to the C ode Page Settings can be fairly complicated only international users of TERM Professional that require complete remapping of the keyboard should use this function Users of the English version of TERM Professional should make the necessary changes to their keyboards using the M odifying Keyboard M appinfunctions found on pag rror Bookmark not defined 1 SelectConfigure Code Page 63 TERM Professional Emulator TheCode Page Settingalialog box is displayed TERM Professional Emulator Figure 23 TERM Professional Code Page Settings Dialog Box D pois Transart amp floceve Codu Pager Video Fem Gede Pago 437 M5005 Lown US Ko
11. connection and is performed automatically pause 2 waitfor word 60 Wait for password prompt prompt Cisco Password Send a Cisco password pause 1 transmit hood r Connect to host hood waitfor login 60 transmit bob r Login as bob waitfor word 60 prompt Hood Password Prompt for password ThePC waits 2 seconds for modem dialing to complete The login script waits up to 60 seconds for the terminal server to provide a password prompt When the terminal server sends the password prompt the PC displays a dialog box with the prompt Cisco Password The user then types in the terminal server password and login to the terminal server completes as in the Direct Dial In example Setting up the Dialer Require a Callback Example In this example the login script requires the host to call back and given permissions to login The modem initialization and dialing is defined in the connection and performed automatically pause 1 waitfor username 20 transmit hood r Send user name response waitfor word 20 prompt Group Password Prompt for group password pause 2 command ath r Hangup pause 1 waitfor RING 60 Host calling back Modem sends tone signal to PC command ata r Answer the phone waitfor name 20 transmit bob r Send user name waitfor word 20 prompt Login Password Prompt for password Restrictions o
12. ind Home nsert H ere Insert emove Delete Select End Prev Screen PageUp N ext Screen Page Down Keypad 0 Keypad 9 Backspace Backspace Keypad 0 Keypad 9 Terminal Emulation Reference VT320 VT220 Byte Sequence EOP EOS E 17 E 21 E 23 E 24 E 25 E 26 E 28 E 29 E 31 E 34 E A E B E C E D E 1 E 2 VEIS E 4 E 5 E 6 0 9 177 115 TinyTERM Emulator Application Mode Keypad Keypad EOI Keypad Keypad EOn Keypad Enter Keypad Enter EOM Requires KEYBOARD EXTBIOS or IN T9 under DOS DEC Compose Key The Compose key is used with the VT220 VT220 7 and VT320 VT320 7 emulations to create multinational characters that do not exist on the keyboard By pressing the Compose key and a two stroke key sequence characters can be created such as a British pound sign or an a umlaut A Press the Compose key before the two character sequence the order of the two character sequence is irrelevant When a valid two stroke sequence is sent after the Compose key the Compose sequence is turned off and the special character is sent to the computer If an improper sequence is sent the Compose sequence aborts a warning bell sounds and no characters are sent to the computer The following table lists the keystrokes required to create nonstandard characters The first column describes the desired character The second column describ
13. mask is the network address with ones in each subnet bit location Continuing with the previous examples Table 7 Subnet Masks Network Host Subnet Bits Subnet Mask Partitions 192 86 85 0 0 0 192 86 85 0 no subnet 192 86 85 0 2 1 192 86 85 128 derived from the binary value of 10000000 192 86 85 0 8 3 192 86 85 224 derived from the binary value of 11100000 Gateways and Routing Gateways are devices on the network that route data betw een networks Data not destined for the sending host s network and subnet if any is sent to the router for transmission to the destination When data is sent on the network the network software on the sending host examines the destination address If the network portion of the destination address does not match the network address of the sending host it is on another network the data is sent to the gateway If the network portion of the destination address matches the network address of the sending host the local subnet mask is applied If the destination address is on this subnet the data is sent directly to the destination machine otherwise the data is sent to the gateway The gateway has two or more network addresses to different networks The gatew ay examines the network address of the destination address looks up routing information for that network and sends the packet to its final destination or to another router in the destination chain 191 Transferring Files Getting
14. on off port swap BS lt gt DEL on off window position window size window state maximized restored Profilexan be created from the default factory settings as well as from an existing profile so you can start a new profile from scratch or base it on an existing profile Profile names can be as simple or descriptive as you like provided they are unique making the method of connecting to the remote host very user friendly Note that profile names are not case sensitive so Name and name are not considered unique Complete access to the list of proflevailable through the File menu or through the Connect dialog This allows settings to be changed quickly and easily letting you switch from one session to the next just by choosing a new profile If any changes are made to the loaded profile i e any of the above settings are modified you are prompted to save them whenever you attempt to load a different profile create a new one or exit the application A profile can also be deleted providing it is not currently in use by another instance of the application HLLAPI Interface USING THEHLLAPI NTERFACE TUTORIAL REFERENCE WRITING AHLLAPI RROGRAM ENABLINGHLLAPIIN TN3270 MULTIPLE SESSIONS SET SESSION PARAMETERS HLLAPI FUNCTIONS FILE TRANSFER Using the HLLAPI Interface The HLLAPI interface is a collection of functions which can be used within a Visual Basic C or C application to indirectly access the
15. the way the modem communicates with the PC or other modem are standardized 5 A cable that connects the PC to the modem or main network computer server To determine the type of hardware used refer to Collecting Installation Information in this chapter A so it may be helpful to review thExample Configurationssection This will provide the necessary assistance to determine the type of hardware to be used as well as helpful hints on the set up of the hardware One 1 44MB 3 5 floppy disk drive e One fixed hard drive with at least 4M B of available space Software e MS DOS or PC DOS version 3 1 or later e MS Windows version 3 1 or higher e NDIS driver oODI driver if using a network interface card Collecting Installation Information TheSetup program requires information about the network connection to properly instalITERM Professional Before proceeding with the setup collect the system and network information described in this section If not familiar with the details of the network check with the System Administrator to gather the information Begin collecting the required information by locating the serial number on the Warranty card that came wit ERM Professional Product Serial Number Product Activation Key To determine other necessary information for installation on Windows 3 1 identify the communication method used by the network Serial or Modem If serial or modem communications are requir
16. to view print and copy files the user created on NFS drives Write Allows members 6 the user group s to modify and delete files the user created on NFS drives Exe Allows members of the user group s to execute files the user created on NFS drives Other Read Allows all other users those other than the user and members of the users group that created the file to view print and copy files the user created on NFS drives Write Allows all other users those other than the user and members of the user s group that created the file to modify and delete files the user created on NFS drives Exe Allows all other users those other than the user and members of the user s group that created the file to execute files the user created on NFS drives Misc Options The miscellaneous options given allow the customization of the N FS system for 2memory cachingand file control Check the boxes in the dialog displayed for each of the options that will be used within the N FS D etailed instructions for each option are given Cache reads Cache writes Follow symbolic links File locking Show dot files Caches data that is read via NFS A cache improves data throughput by assigning a section of RAM to temporarily store data blocks being transferred into or out of a device NFS determines the size of the cache Caches data that is written via NFS This option allows the symbolic links for the files transferred to b
17. window display or if it will be minimized at startup Place a check in this box if the Server should be minimized at startup 217 Century NFS e Preferred Transfer Size The size of the read write blocks may be changed as required Select the desired size from the pull down list e Export Mounts in UNIX Style If the files exported from the Server should be formatted for UNIX placea check in this box When files are transferred in UNIX format clients will see the exported directory as c tmp rather than c tmp e PCNFS Daemon On Place a check in this box if the Server should act as an authenticator for the network e Port Mapping Daemon On This checkbox must be selected as on if the Server On option is checked This determines if the Server is running on a port Setup Users Users must be setup on the Server to be allowed access to the Server Select Options Setup Users to display the Setup U ser dialog box e UserName Type the user name that will be allowed access to the Server If a user is to be removed from access to the Server click onthe Remove button after typing the user name e Password Type the password for the user This will be required when the user is attempting to access the Server e UID Typea User Identification UID number or click on Create Unique ID to have the UID created automatically The UID will be used when transferring files to or from a UNIX machine UNIX determines read write and exec
18. 4 If the Scaletoa TERM Font is selected TERM Professional automatically scales the current font to display a standard 80x24 or 80x25 character screen in the current window size If a 132 column mode sequence is received the font will adjust to the size of the Window TERM Professional Emulator 5 To accept the new settings presSNTER Or click on theOK Button To reject the new settings pressSC Or click on theCancel Button Changing Login Settings This function will be used when the set up of an auto login is required An auto login allows the user to connect and login into the remote computer in one step The required parameters for the login will be entered in this function and will be used by TERM Professional when connecting to the remote system to determine the correct procedure for logging into the system O ptions included in the auto login include setting up the user name to be used the password and the scheme name system type 1 Select Configure Login The Login Setup dialog box is displayed Figure 21 TERM Professional Login Setup Dialog Box Usewawe Co Basss 2 Ehoro sase UN a Ca aain fasean Boe n EES Options available include e Username This field should contain the response required by the remote system s login prompt e Password This field should contain the response required by the remote system s Password prompt The contents of this field are automatically encr
19. Auto Text Conversion turned on The automatic file restart facility detects this and restarts from the beginning of the file In the manual case using the r option be careful Transferring Files Using this option users or programs could examine a logfile and determine which systems did not receive full files for the preceding transfer and restart transfers for them This method allows script files to be written that will not fail totally just because one or more specific remote sites have experienced total failure 83 Serial and M odem Connections Serial and Modem Connections n This Section Direct Connections Modem Connections Establishing Modem Connections Manually The RS 232 Standard Direct Connections TERM Professionakan be used to directly connect the PC to a multi user system usually UNIX A direct connection requires a properly made cable to connect the serial port on the PC to a serial port on a multi user host system This cable is known as an RS 232 or serial cable SeBhe R S 232 Standardater in this section Modem Connections TERM Professional now provides automatttayes modem access This means that TERM Professional can be allowed to provide the defaidayes compatible modem command codes to perform functions such as dialing and hanging up CommonH ayes commands also called the AT command set are listed on the next page These commands allow the manual entry of initialization strings to enhance speed
20. Bar Tab Click O ptions Preferences Button Bartmbet up how the button bar displays in the TN 3270 terminal emulator Show Button Bar Check this box to display the button bar on the TN 3270 emulator Button Bar Configuration Click this button to display the Configure Button Bar Dialog Profile Tab Click O ptions Preferences Profiletablisplay the options for saving changes to profiles Prompt Before Saving Changes Click here to be asked if you want to save changes to a profile before the changes are saved Save Changes Automatically Click here if you want changes to a profile saved automatically without a prompt asking you whether to save the profile changes Ignore Changes Click here if you don t want changes to a profile saved Configure Button Bar Dialog Place your cursor in any of the gray space on the buttamUatouble click to display the Configure Button Badialog Button Properties Show Button Image Check this box to display an icon on the buttons Show Button Text Check this box to display the name of the buttons Text at Right Side of Image Check this box to display the name of the button to the right of the icon on the button Enlarge Image Check this box to make the buttbigyer Button Box Properties Left Click this radio button to display the buttoddyan the left side of the window Right Click this radio button to display the buttoddyan the right side of the window Floating Click this radio button t
21. DIS example on an Microsoft Windows for Workgroups machine that is also running the Microsoft Windows for Workgroups network NDIS_ DRIVER is a placeholder for the network card section namein PROTOCOL INI CONFIG SYS LASTDRIVE Z DEVICEHIGH C WINDOWSI IFSHLP SYS AUTOEXEC BAT C WINDOWS NET START set path C CENTURY PATH C WINDOWS PROTOCOL INI NDIS_ DRIVER DRIVERNAME NDIS_ DRV MAR_NDIS DRIVERNAME MAR_NDI BINDINGS NDIS_ DRIVER PCXNET_INT 0X60 180 ExampleN DIS and ODI Configurations Other sections to support Microsoft Windows for Workgroups network are also included C WINDOWS SYSTEM INI network drivers netcard NDIS_ DRV DOS devdir C WINDOWS transport C CENTURY MAR_NDIS DOS ndishlp sys netbeui loadRMdrivers yes NDIS Version 3 Enhanced Mode NDIS Driver Here is the same N DIS example on an MS Windows for Workgroups machine that is also running the MS Windows for Workgroups network NDIS DRIVER is a place holder for the network card section namein PROTOCOL INI CONFIG SYS LASTDRIVE Z DEVICEHIGH C WINDOWS IFSHLP SYS AUTOEXEC BAT C WINDOWS NET START set path C CENTURY PATH C WINDOWS PROTOCOL INI NDIS_ DRIVER DRIVERNAME NDIS_DRV C WINDOWS SYSTEM INI boot secondnet drv C CENTURY mar_net drv 886Enh device C CENTURY mar_nfs 386 device C CENTURY mar_com 386 device C CENTURY mar_tcp 386 181 Century TCP Century Binding NDIS_DRV If Windows for Workgroups is ru
22. Eont Font Style Size Cox Peou e 85140em Regular 11 _cancet_ Courier Italic iti _Cancol_ Bold MS LineDraw Bold Italic ba Sample AaBbYy2z Scroll through each list and make the desired selections then click OK Troubleshooting LPR Files do not print properly The wrong filter may have been used Find out what the correct filter is select it and re send the job Microsoft Windows may have been configured with a printer that does not match the printer device Review the printer setup in Control Panel Printers Error message is displayed The remote LPD is not available or is out of service C ontact the system administrator Cannot Print to a Network Printer Perhaps the network printer does not support Line Printer Daemon LPD Change the defined protocol for the printer Ronfigure Protocol Logging LPR Messages LPR contains a facility to log messages M essages are logged to the SYSLOG file in the TERM Professionainstallation directory The SYSLOG fileis an ASCII file Use Century Windows Notepad to view the file SintEERM Professionalapplications including LPR write to the SYSLOG periodically the SYSLOG entries displayed by Notepad may not be current For that reason do not keep N otepad opened on the system log for long periods of time M ore or less log information is placed in the system log through the Options Message Logging Level menu item Level zero logs the least messages
23. File Transfers This checkbox determines if file transfers can be performed If checked file transfers are permitted If unchecked no file transfers can occur Enable Sysop Chat This checkbox determines whether the Sysop is available to be paged for chat If checked the Sysop chat function is available If unchecked the Sysop chat function is disabled TERM Professional Emulator Opening Banner File This edit field provides the name of a text file to display when a successful connection is made Either type the file name if the pathname is known or press the Browse button to determine the correct name Message of the Day File This edit field provides the name of a text file to use for the message of the day Either type the file name if the pathname is known or press the Browse button to determine the correct name Async Select this radio button to place hostmode in asynchronous ready mode Network Select this radio button to place hostmode in network ready mode e WTERMCRC Server Selecting this button enables TERM Professional to accept remote commands from another WTERM CRC capable product e Zmodem Server Selecting this button enables TERM Professional to accept remote commands from another Zmodem capable product e FTP Selecting this server option allows the use of the FTP options as described in theTransferring Filesection of this manual There are several options available when this selection is marked e Activate
24. How the printer is enabled for the network e Whether printing PC files from an application or from File M anager Before Starting Before using LPR check the following e The hostname or IP address of the machine providing service for the intended network printer e Thename of the network printer if it has a name that will be used Starting LPR The LPR application is installed automatically whefiERM Professionals installed Look for the N etwork Printing icon in the Century program group Figure 1 LPR Icon Q 225 N amp work A plications Windows 95 After selecting the Network Printing icon from the Century program group the main LPR screen is displayed 1 2 Select File New Port The Port Name dialog box will be displayed Type the desired host name exclamation point and the printer name e g sales oki The format of the entry is very important for this item If an invalid host name is entered a message will be displayed to that effect The Port Name will then need to be re entered with a valid host name Click OK when the information entered is correct After adding the Port N ame for the printer the remaining printer information will be entered using the Windows 95 Settings Printers option Select the Add Printer icon 1 The printer wizard information will be displayed Click Next 2 Theoption is then given to have the printer set up as a local printer or asa network printer Select the lo
25. Inserts a copy of the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point replacing the selected text if any with text from the Clipboard This command is not available if the Clipboard is empty 156 Setting up the Dialer Delete Deletes the selected item Depending on which tab and control are selected this menu may change For example when accessing the Modem tab with Modem Type selected to delete this menu item becomes Delete M odem e Options Always On Top Keeps the Dialer window or icon above any other application Minimized At Startup Minimizes the Dialer window when the Dialer starts Auto Dialing When checked enables auto dialing capability When another application capable of invoking auto dialing does so the Dialer automatically starts and dials e Tools Initial Setup Assistant Starts a series of dialogs that go through step by step the initial set up of the Dialer parameters See Using the Initial Setup Assistant on page 145 New Connection Assistant Starts a series of dialogs that provide step by step assistance when setting up the connection This feature may be used each time to define anew connection See Using the New Connection Assistant on page 145 Login Scripts A login script is a file consisting of a set of special commands arranged to perform the tasks to be performed each time a host is logged into A new script file may be created a script file may be deleted or edited using Microsoft Win
26. Misc 2 Select Output to Logfile enabled 3 Enter a path and file name in the field labelled Logfile name If a path is not entered FTP stores the file in the PC s root directory 4 Click OK The Output Window Command Line The bottom portion of the output window enclosed in an outline is a command field FTP commands may besent to the remote host by typing them in this field To see a list of commands enter a question mark on the command line The FTP application sends the commands to the host and returns responses to the output window Using this command line is optional it is not needed to perform normal FTP operations Troubleshooting FTP If a problem is encountered while using FTP always check the FTP Output window immediately The output window is where FTP logs all system commands and error messages and is the best source of troubleshooting information This section describes common problems and presents some suggestions for troubleshooting Find the description below that best matches the problem and try the corresponding suggestions Unsuccessful connection to the host e Makesurethenetwork software is installed and running e Makesurethe remote host is available for connection Use a utility such as Ping to verify connectivity with the host e Check the output window for a message such as Incorrect account information or Login incorrect If such a message is displayed go back to the Sessio
27. Send Ctrl Enter E7 Keypad Enter Keypad Enter M Esc Esc NE Print Print Screen EP Requires KEYBOARD EXTBIOS or IN T9 under DOS Local Print Sequences The WYSE WY 60 uses the following sequences On Ed Off al 126 Terminal Emulation Reference IBM 3151 Emulation Description The IBM 3151 emulation is a full screen 24 or 25 line emulation of the IBM 3151 terminal All IBM 3151 control sequences are processed including transparent print An extended keyboard is required to access the following IBM 3151 function keys F11 F12 F23 F24 F35 F36 Keyboard Layout The IBM 3151 uses a Line Turnaround Character in many of its control sequences This is represented in the following table through the use of lt LTA gt This character is chosen within the emulation setup dialog Table 9 IBM 3151 Keyboard Layout IBM 3151 IBM PC IBM 3151 Keyboard Keyboard Byte Sequence F1 F12 F1 F12 Ea lt LTA gt EI lt LTA gt F13 F24 Shift F 1 Shift 12 Ela lt LTA gt E I lt LTA gt F25 F36 Ctrl Shift F 1 E a lt LTA gt Ctrl Shift F 12 E I lt LTA gt T i EA 4 4 EB gt EC z ED Home Home EH Clear Ctrl H ome EL lt LTA gt Erase Input Ctril Page Up EK Erase EOF Page Down El Erase EOP Ctrl Page Down EJ Insert Character Insert EP Insert Line CtrlHnsert EN 127 TinyTERM Emulator Table 9 IBM 3151 Keyboard Layout Continued IBM 3151 IBM PC IBM 3151 Keyboard Keyboard Byte Seque
28. System Files 67 TERM Professional for Windows Startup O utling sssssssssssssnsnsansusannnnannnnnnan 67 TERM Professional Shutdown Outine sssssssssssssannusunnnnnnnnnunannnnannnnannnnanannanan 68 Keyboard Remapp ng sssssssssssususunnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnunununnnnnannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanananannnnnnnnnnnan 69 QUOted Sti NGS csesesseseeseesseeseneessesseeseenoeseeeseeneesoesseesennesoessnesnenecsnesnennennss 69 TCP IP Terminal Type Q UerieS s ssssssssssususnnsusnnnusannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnunannnnannnnannnnanannanan 70 TERM Professional Environment V ariableS ssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 70 TERM Professional Transferring Files w Etiles Treats het o scaenscsczssadeloacyatesastcdmandadedtedasatashadiestesastebaasdedalealesshechad sstahahions 71 Usins File Transferases aeto iana EEIE this tienes ved winded 73 WTERMCRC and ZMODEM ccccccccccsessessscceessceececcesesseececceseseeecuseseeeccesseaeeesenes 79 Xmodem XModemCRC Ymodem and Zmodewh ccccceeescceesesssesccccesessseeeeeesees 82 PA E AEE EAEE E ELTE E E AE E A AE A T ETE 83 Restarting Interrupted Transfers cecsccccceecesesceeeeeneceeceeceeeneeceeeeeeeseeeesseeeceeeeeeaes 84 Serial and Modem Connections se PYF E EEC OMMCCTOIG csns cssceeazusscosossieessvasseses obeo BEEE SSES AAAA MSASA AAI A erien retete rettete eee 87 Modem ConnectionSs rarna a A RE ENNES 87 Establishing Modem Connections Manually eeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeies
29. Troubleshooting Protocol Manager PROTMAN Displays an Error Compare the entries madein config sys autoexec bat and protocol ini with the Example NDIS and ODI Configurations in Appendix B Carefully examinethe protocol ini file The Century TCP section MAR_NDIS has a BINDINGS statement that must point to the protocol ini section name of the network adapter Netbind Fails Verify that the network devices loaded in config sys load correctly M ost of these devices emit diagnostic messages when they are loaded Ensure that the diagnostic messages are error free If error messages occur carefully examine each network DEVICE statement in config sys Next examine the protocol ini file Ensure that the MAR_NDIS section s BINDINGS statement correctly matches the section name for the network adapter If N etbind still fails refer to the Netbind Error Codes section in this manual If problems still occur comment out the Century TCP commandsin config sys by placing REM at the beginning of the line Leave the previous network s device statements unchanged Reboot the PC to ensure that the pre existing network configuration is correct If there are problems with the pre existing configuration refer to the user s manual for that particular network Netbind Succeeds but Only One Network Protocol Works Edit config sys and place REM at the beginning of the Century TCP command line Leave the previous network s device statements unchanged
30. all nodes on the network in the Broadcast Address box Refer to the Broadcast Addresses section in this manual for more information A datagram sent to the broadcast address is received by all hosts on a network and processed as if the datagram was sent directly to each host 6 Select File Save Changes Using BOOTP or DHCP BOOTP and DHCP are alternative methods for configuring the PC name PC IP address subnet mask and broadcast address for the PC BOOTP and DHCP request this information dynamically from a BOOTP or DHCP server on the network when the PC starts After confirming with the System A dministrator that BOOTP or DHCP is available on the network 1 After double clicking on the Century TCP icon select Configure Interface 2 Select Enable Remote Configuration The PC Name PC IP Address Subnet M ask and Broadcast A ddress fields become unselectable 3 Select one of the following Use BOOTP Provides TCP IP configuration parameters to the PC viaa BOOTP server on the network Use DHCP Provides TCP IP configuration parameters to the PC viaa DHCP server on the network 4 Select File Save Changes 133 Century TCP Configuring Gateway Machines Gateway machines let one subnet talk to another subnet within a network Communication is usually limited to the systems directly connected to the network Contact the System A dministrator for the gatew ay addresses that may be used Up to four gateways may be
31. and performance when dialing out and connecting to a remote computer via modem Establishing Modem Connections Manually In order to communicate with a remote host computer through a modem first communication must be established with the modem and command it to dial If using a 100 H ayes compatible modem the procedure for connecting will look like this 1 StartTERM Professionaland enter terminal mode by pressing 2 TypeAT If the modem is connected properly K or o will be displayed depending on the setting of the V command for the modem A response from the modem verifies that the connection between the terminal and the modem is correct 87 TERM Professional If there is no response from the modem make sure the modem is communicating by typingATQO 1 If there is still no response check the cabling and port 3 Type ATDT1 800 555 1212 to dial the phone If near the modem listen fora dial tone and dialing depending on the setting of the M command on the modem 4 Upon connection to the remote computer the messagEO NNECT will be displayed At this point connection is made and communication with the remote host should be established 5 To disconnect from the remote host type This will get the modem s attention and allow hangup command 6 TypeATHO This causes the modem to disconnect the phone line The above is a basic example The specific connection may require additional commands See
32. are shown below in parentheses Untitled 5250 Terminal File Edit Disconnect Options Window Help W 8 elele 2 KE r pe fe Ceara erie et ays pelea at ne es Once eine eat HIGH INTENSITY ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789 1 amp 4 Bene NT Caer y HI INTENSITY Wie tee Undin amp Hi Int Reverse Video Teormected TT Connect Connect Disconnect Disconnect T N5250 Auxiliary Keypad Window Auxiliary Keypad Symbol Keypad Window Symbol Keypad Select Screen Edit Select Screen Copy Edit Copy Paste Edit Paste Options Map Keyboard SBE eaoTHeHAS Colors Options Preferences Colors i Fonts Options Preferences Font Auto Size on the O ptions Preferences Fonts tab Help Help Index Context Sensitive Help not a menu item BE is bl Exit FileExit File Menu The File menuwontains two sections one allowing you to manipulate profiles and another allowing you to exithe application You have the following choices on the File menu New Used to load an Untitled profile having default settings Open Used to load a previously created profile Delete and O penan only be used if there A are one or more profiles available to the application Save Used to savthe currently loaded profile If the currently loaded profile is Untitled then a name must first be assigned to the profile and so theffiavtions as a Saves S
33. be descriptive so other users will know which printer is referenced 6 Click OK The new printer is added to the Printer N ame listbox The bracketed information next to the name is the local Windows printer or remote network printer associated with the new printer name Initially the printer association is set to the default Windows printer To associate to a different printer see the instructions below for associating a local or network printer to a printer name If a default Windows printer is not defined the bracketed information will be displayed as lt non defined on nul gt Associating a Local or Network Printer to a Printer Name To allow Windows to reference the correct printer and configuration when using LPD the printer name must be associated with a printer set up in Windows To make this association selectthe Properties button from the Windows 95 N etwork dialog then 1 Select the Services tab A list of managed services displays Highlight the desired printer then select the Configure button Click on the New button Type the desired name for the printer Oe Os oS Highlight the printer for the association If more than one printer name is selected any changes will be applied to all selections However only the first name selected displaysin the Specify Network Printer Connection dialog Click Connect The Specify Network Printer Connection dialog displays Decide what type of printer should be associat
34. being used If using WTERMCRC type term 1x When TERM is started and in server mode it will respond with the message OK 79 TinyTERM Emulator 2 Initiate the transfer from the M ain Menu or Quick Keys 3 When the transfer is complete exit server mode on the remote system If using WTERMCRC press Ctrl X five times Xmodem XmodemCRC Ymodem and Zmodem These public domain protocols are very similar in functionality and operation Xmodem protocol TinyTERM s Xmodem protocol is the standard Xmodem Checksum protocol It does not support wildcard file transfers XmodemCRC protocol TinyTERM s XmodemCRC protocol is the standard XmodemCRC protocol It does not support wildcard file transfers The Christiansen protocol is part of the XmodemCRC protocol and may not be specified separately It does not support wildcard file transfers Ymodem protocol TinyTERM s Ymodem protocol is the standard Ymodem batch protocol with 1K packets It supports single and wildcard file transfers Zmodem protocol TinyTERM s Zmodem protocol is the standard Zmodem sliding window protocol Similar to WTERM CRC Zmodem can automatically adjust the size of its packets and window See WTERMCRC for details on manually adjusting these options It supports single and wildcard file transfers 80 Transferring Files Using these protocols To send from TinyTERM to a remote server 1 Run the protocol in receive mode on the remote system 2 In
35. classes Permissions refer to the type of access a user may have to a file or directory such as read write or execute U ser classes refer to the type of user that has access to a file or directory such as the user group and other See the following tables for additional explanations Table 3 Permission Authorizations Permission Authorization write Allows the user to modify or delete a file execute Allows the user to run a file as a program Table 4 User Class Listing User Class Users Included group a collection of users who have a common group name other everyone else When a file or directory is created or copied ona Century NFS drive the file or directory is created or copied with the file permission settings defined in Control Panel Network Drive Permissions and user classes can only be set for a file by a user that created by the file Permissions may not be changed for files owned by other users 204 NFS Client To change default permissions 1 2 3 4 Select Control Panel Network or Control Panel Network PC NFSon a Windows for Workgroups network The Century NFS Network Configuration dialog displays Select Drives Select the appropriate box under File Permissions Click OK Connecting to a Network Drive A connection can be established between the PC and a network drive Once established the network drive has a DOS drive letter For example F just like the local PC
36. communication is carried on in the form of packets Packets are bundles of information regulated by TCP so that communication between two network nodes can take place Displays the total number of packets sent and received along with a duplicate packet count and a count of retransmitted packets Bytes Viewing UDP Activity N etwork Connections Packets are composed of bytes of information Displays the total number of bytes sent and received that are kept along with a duplicate byte count and acount of retransmitted bytes The period information is the total number of bytes sent and received the duplicate byte count and a count of the bytes that were retransmitted for this period The time frame for the period to display is defined in File Update Status To display the User Datagram Protocol UDP activity for the current Century TCP session select View Statistics UDP The total number of Datagrams sent and received along with the errors during this Century TCP session will be displayed The same information displays for the period asdefinedin File Update Status Viewing IP Activity To display the Internet Protocol IP activify for the current Century TCP session select View Statistics IP The total number of Datagrams sent and received along with the errors during the Century TCP session will be displayed The same information displays for the period as defined in File Update Status Viewing Network Interface A
37. corporations and small businesses who transfer large amounts of data between offices Using File Transfer Transferring files is basically the same for all protocols but have some minor differences This section discusses the basics Later in the chapter each protocol is discussed and the minor differences outlined To send receive file s To send or receive data click on either the Send File s or the Receive File s buttons or type S to send files or R to receive files An additional selection is given to Request File s This option should be used if the remote system is operating as a server For example when using a transfer protocol where the remote system is set up in server mode and simply waits for requests for transfer the Request File s options should be used When a server is not invoked on the remote system use the Receive File s option The information entered in the File Transfer Dialog Box will be used when transferring the file s A status of the transfer will be displayed as shown 71 TinyTERM Emulator Figure 1 Transfer Status Dialog Box File Transfer Status x Transfer Statistics Protoco WTERMCRC File Name Bytes Transferred Percent Transferred 0 Transfer Time Effective Baud Rate Number of packets Restarts Retries wit aaa Last Message X Depending on whether a file is being transferred or received the button in the upper right of the screen will either display Ab
38. documentation fi allowed buffer sizes Read Size Select the size in bytes for each NFS read transfer Read size can be set specific to each server If the PC network card can handle 8192 byte packets select 8192 If a decrease in performance is experienced due to lost or dropped packets decrease the read size to the next lowest value Write Size Select the size in bytes for each NFS write transfer Write size can be set specific to each server For maximum performance select 8192 If a decrease in performance is experienced due to lost or dropped packets decrease the write size to the next lowest value File Permissions File Permissions determine the rights and privileges users will have when accessing files on the system Users are assigned to one or more groups Each group on the system may be a specific department or have commqn duties that require access to certain files If a user is assigned to a group the user will have access or privileges to the same files as the group they are assigned to It is possible to assign one user to numerous groups if necessary D etailed explanations for each of the permission selections is given below User Read Allows the user to view print and copy files created on NFS drives Write Allows the user to modify and delete files the user created on NFS drives Exe Allows the user to execute files the user created on NFS drives Group Read Allows members of the user group s
39. double clicking on the Century TCP icon select Configure Hosts File Select the desired filefrom the Host File Entries listbox Enter the changes to the existing entry Click Change uP Ww N Select File Save Changes 135 Century TCP Deleting a Hosts File Entry To delete a hosts file 1 After double clicking on the Century icon select Configure Hosts File 2 Select the file to delete in the H ost File Entries listbox 3 Click Delete The information is deleted from the H ost File Entries listbox 4 Select File Save Changes Finding a Hosts File Entry To search for Host File Entries quickly perform the following steps 1 Click Find 2 Enter a complete IP address host name or aliasnameinthe Find Hosts File Entry dialog 3 Click Search The system highlights the entry inthe Hosts File Entries listbox Sorting Host File Entries To sort Host File Entries by either IP address or hostname choose IP Address or Hostname Checking the Network The ping utility was designed as a tool to check network communications and name resolution This is helpful to find out if the PC can communicate with a particular host Using ping the PC sends a signal to the host to verify that communication is possible Ping is only useful when the N etwork Status Line states LAN UP If the N etwork Status field says LAN DN or the status window does not show a successful outcome after pinging the host verify that the IP add
40. drive window select Close Century FTP Transferring Files and Directories FTP allows the transfer of files and directories between the host and the PC However FTP cannot transfer files between a local PC drive and another local PC drive If files must be moved between local PC drives use the M icrosoft Windows File M anager or Windows Explorer if Windows 95 is installed To transfer files and directories betw een the host and the PC 1 Decide which types of files wi II be transfered and set the transfer mode using the appropriate button on the toolbar Select E Text for files that contain A SCII characters only PC text files can be displayed in Windows N otepad and usually have extensions such as TXT BI Binary for executable files or application programs PC binary files usually have extensions such as EXE or COM EX Tenex for TEN EX also known as Local8 files These mode options are also available through the menus When Session Transfer is selected the transfer type is saved for that connection If the type is not known for the files to be transferred select binary mode AIl executable files transfer correctly and text files are readable H ow ever some host files may use different end of line codes than those used in DOS text files Those text files may need reformatting after transfer 2 Select the file s or directory to transfer e To select several adjacent files click on the first
41. drives To connect to a network drive 1 Select File Manager Disk Connect Network Drive or File Manager Disk Connect Network Drive PC NFS on a Windows for Workgroups network Enter the network path or select a path from the N etwork Path drop down list e g hood eng tools Be sure to use the forward slash not a backslash in the network path OR Click Browse to search for PCN FS capable hosts Enter an NFS host name or IP address in H ost Selected Press Enter OR Click an NFS Host name to bring up alist of mountable directories Double click a mountable directory N etwork Path is filled in Select a DOS drive from the Local Device drop down list All the remaining settings have been copied over from eeatury NFSNetwork Configurations Drives settings These settings may be modified to make them specific to this connectionCSadizuring Network Drives on page200 for explanations on these settings 205 Century NFS 6 Click Connect The Century Network Connection Results dialog displays Disconnecting from a Network Drive To disconnect from a network drive 1 Select File Manager Disk Disconnect Network Drive 2 Select an NFS connection from the list of connected drives OR On Microsoft Windows click Select All to select all connections 3 Click Disconnect Logging On to Century NFS If the authenticator is changed the new authenticator will not be valid until logging out
42. each device is assigned a number This must bea unique number for each device Check the NIC network interface card for the number assigned to the card 9 Input and Output information going into or out of a computer or computer device 4 Installing TERM Professional L Start Windows if using Windows 3 1 start in enhanced mode 2 Insert theTERM Professionakiskette into a diskette drive the examples given in this manual use drive A 3 SelectProgram Manager File Run for Windows 3 1 Windows for Workgroups or selecRun from the Windows 95 startup menu 4 Inthe Command Line text box type a setup Click OK Begin Install The initialSetupscreen will then be displayed The options are given to click NEXT to continue with Setup clickKiELP to print the installation worksheet or click CANCEL to end the installation The installation worksheet can also be found in thecal Area N etwork LAN Worksheeton page4 The information requested on this worksheet must be entered correctly to ensure thaEERM ProfessionaWill function properly The following additional user information is required Table 1 Installation Information Option Description Name User name Company Company Name Serial Number The serial number located on the Warranty card that came with the TERM Professional software Activation Key Type the Activation Key as shown on the Warranty card that came with the Simply NFS software Specifying Install
43. entered Gateway 1 is the default Gateways 2 3 and 4 are alternate routes when machines can t be reached throught the previous gateway To configure the local network gateway machines 1 After double clicking on the Century TCP icon select Configure Gateways 2 Enter up to four gateways gateway 1is the default 3 Select File Save Changes Configuring DNS Parameters Century TCP must be configured to use a Domain N ame Server DNS or a H osts file see Configuring H osts Files to resolve machine names into Internet addresses If using both Century TCP determines who goes first by looking at what was defined during installation see the Installation section of this manual To configure the local domain s name and name servers 1 After double clicking on the Century TCP icon select Configure DNS 2 Enter the local domain name given to the local network in the Domain Name box 3 Enter up to four name servers in the four boxes provided A nameserver is the IP A ddress of the server that stores resource records about hosts and is accessed to resolve host names into IP Addresses If Name Server 1 cannot resolve the name Name Server 2 is tried and so on 4 Select File Save Changes Configuring Hosts Files 134 Century TCP requires either a Domain NameServer DNS described previously or a Hosts file If both are used Century TCP determines which will be used first by referring to entries made during ins
44. error and nothing happens or the cursor backspaces but does not erase the character toggle to the correct code Line Mode In TTY mode each character is ordinarily sent to the remote as soon as possible after it has been typed If the remoteis echoing each character may be individually processed and returned to the TN 3270 client producing a great deal of network traffic and slowing down the server host When Line M odeis enabled characters are not sent to the Tel net server until you press Enter Accumulated characters are sent to the host all at once thereby reducing network traffic Thereis a limit of 128 to the number of characters that may be accumulated in this fashion After this limit has been reached characters are ignored until the user presses Enter Line M odeis best suited for command line based applications such as a log in shell and is not well suited for applications such as full screen editors Control e may be used to toggle local echo For example you may want to type control e before entering a password to prevent characters from being echoed to the screen and then press control e to re enable echoing after the password has been entered Characters typed between control e entries are sent to the remote even though they do not appear on screen In Line Mode you may perform editing on typed characters before they are sent to the remote The following keys may be used for editing backspace erases th
45. es Character Set 5E 5F 7c 7D 7E PERE BRITISH H A epee CANADIAN alale alale DANISH FINNISH ITALIAN NORWEGIAN SPANISH SWISS 107 TinyTERM Emulator IBM PC Character Set Table 3 IBM PC Character Set ee ee 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 NUL son sT Etx cor Ena acK A Bs Hr LF VT FF cR so SI 10 d g 2 fj i a RA ne e p d aJ aK AL AM an 40 1 26 29 16 DLE 001 Dos pcs Nik SN oe cAn SUB ESC FS GS RS gt a L a AP AVY AW AA E a A 37 A a 66 67 D is z f 74 Cc f J w o N O EEE N TE 3 i P 64 65 2 A 5 81 83 H 93 94 Q A S S gt ja X 99 100 101 102 103 mea te 1ER r 109 110 111 as d e f g m n o 7 112 113 114 115 aa 117 118 119 120 121 122 vo kes 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 i A A 144 145 146 r F pa ma 5 153 ba a m 157 158 159 E fe P f A 160 162 163 164 i tar 168 169 170 ue ue 173 174 175 a i gt 176 Lig ia 181 182 183 4 a 185 186 187 198 189 190 191 J J L l 7 E 5 1 C ire 193 194 Me 196 197 198 199 ate 202 an 205 206 207 E E 4 i DEAE 208 210 cat ae 213 214 215 ae 218 219 221 222 223 _ T a E a I I E oe ae fi 232 233 234 235 237 238 239 Q o g A MAEAEA KAKALA EALE EAA a y 2 i 108 Terminal Emulation Reference Terminal Emulation Reference AT386 Console Emulation DEC VT52 Emulation DEC VT100 Emulat
46. except that the specified string is searched for using a case insensitive comparison Login Script File Examples The following examples are script files that provide a sample of how a script can be created If these examples are used as a base for the script be sure to modify all areas that will differ in the specific environment This includes such as items as login and password prompts host names and user names 161 Century TCP Login Example The following script logs into a host machine waitfor login 60 Wait for login banner transmit bob r Login as bob waitfor word 60 Wait for password prompt prompt Hood Password Prompt user for password This script has the PC wait up to 60 seconds for the host hood to transmit a login prompt back to the PC When the PC receives the login prompt it sends the user name bob to the host and waits for hood to send a password prompt When it does the PC displays a dialog box with the prompt H ood Password The user types the appropriate password and the login will complete The r is a standard character designating a carriage return Comments in the file shown in these examples on the right sides of the lines are preceded with semicolons Terminal Server Login Example 162 In this example the script directs the PC to login to a host over telephone lines through a terminal server The modem initialization and dialing is defined in the
47. file then hold down the Shift key and click on the last file To select files not adjacent to one another click on the first file then hold down the Ctrl key and click on each additional file FTP cannot transfer multiple selected directories To transfer one directory and its contents including subdirectories select the directory only 199 N etwork A pplications 3 Drag and drop the selection to the target directory or select File Copy File To drag and drop position the cursor anywhere over the selection Click and hold the mouse button as you drag the selection over to the other window When the cursor is positioned over the target directory release the mouse button Look at the status line in the lower right corner as you move the cursor The status line will show the name of the current target directory 4 When the confirmation dialog appears make sure the Destination Directory and files are correct Then click Copy Files Managing Files and Directories FTP provides some but not all of the capabilities provided by the Microsoft Windows File Manager Functions in FTP include e Sort the file list by name type size date or type of file e Choose which file details to display e Expand all directories to show one or all levels below e Change thefile list to display a different top directory e Create new directories e Delete files e Rename files e Preview a file using its associated application e Print text fil
48. for receiving files with the external protocol M aximum Consecutive Bad Packets This is an edit field Use this field to set the maximum number of consecutive bad packets that may be received before TERM aborts a file transfer The default value is 10 Set the value lower if you want TERM to abort sooner during transfers across noisy communications lines If the phone line is very noisy even TERMerror checking protocols may not be able to transfer a file A bad packet one that do sarrive intact is retransmitted H owever if packets are consistently bad it may be better to abort the transfer and try again later Retransmitting packets takes time and thus increases the time of a file transfer e Restarts TERMCRC WTERM CRC This edit field turns on or off the restartable file transfer feature If this field is set at 0 restarts are not attempted If the field is set at 1 or more TERM attemptsn times to restart a file transfer after interruption Restartable file transfers are only attempted if the file transfer protocol is TERM CRC or WTERMCRC Post Transfer Script If acustom script should be executed after the transfer is complete the appropriate directory and file name may be entered for this option Either type the information or press th rowse button to determine the correct directory and file to be entered for this item if any To accept the new settings presSNTER Or click on theOK Button To reject the new settin
49. if the file is in TROFF select the TROFF filter so that the network printer can filter the file to print correctly Itis very important to know the capabilities of the remote printer If a TROFF print job is sent to a printer that does not understand TROFF the print job might print unexpected characters or might be discarded LPR offers the following filter options for the LPD protocol Table 1 Filter Options for LPD Protocol Filter Description CIF Prints file with data produced by cif plot Ditroff Treats data in file as ditroff output DVI Prints the file in TeX output FORTRAN Causes the first column of each line to be interpreted asa FORTRAN carriage control Treats data in file as output from the Berkeley UNIX plot library Prints the file with a heading page numbers and pagination The heading includes the date and time that printing started the title and page number identifier followed by the page number You cannot specify the length of the page Sun Raster Causes the file to be printed as Sun Raster format Text no CTRL chars Prints the file as a text file with no control characters Text CTRL chars Prints the file as a text file with control characters TROFF Causes the file to be printed as Graphic Systems C A T photo typesetter input 236 Printing Files LPR To specify a filter 1 Select Configure Protocol Select the LPD protocol from Available Protocols Click Configure LPD Protocol Op
50. it times out and displays an error To accept the new settings pres amp NTER Or click on theOK Button To reject the new settings pres amp SC Or click on theCance Button Changing Keyboard Mappings The Keyboard M appings may be modified to accomodate specialized communication between systems i e DOS to UNIX systems 1 SelectConfigure Keyboard or click on theXeyboard Setup Button on the 52 default Ribbon Bar TheKeyboard Selecitdialog box is displayed TERM Professional Emulator Figure 14 TERM Professional Keyboard Select Dialog Box 2 Select the keyboard scheme to edit or load To load the keyboard scheme and have the key mappings take effect click theOK button To close theKeyboard Selectdialog without selecting a keyboard click the Cancel button To edit an existing keyboard scheme click thigdit button To create a new keyboard scheme type a description in th eyboard Scheme edit field and click the dit button The Keyboard Editodialog box is displayed Figure 15 TERM Professional Keyboard Editor Dialog Box Keyboard Editor Default United States z Cancel_ Chat Reset au Keyname Action Value T perar E Clipboard r Value Viewer 3 The keyboard editor controls and buttons are as follows The Keyboard pop up list box This field selects the default keyboard to remap The displayed keyboard will change to ma
51. item to have factory default settings loaded Default settings are also loaded by selecting Default from the Profilekistbox in the Connect dialog You can then configure profile settings as desired select File Save Aas described in the Save Save As Profile section to save the new profile TN5250 Emulator INTRODUCTION CONNECTING TO AREMOTE TN5250 SYSTEM MODIFYING AHOST RECALLLIST USING COMMANDLINE CONNECT OPTIONS I STINGEEHEARO OISBA Rotter reat cera ee eae Oe ee Oe a AAT ee I STE RA OS ST T 4 FILE MENU EDIT MENU EXIRON DIS CTOI NINES C4 A sasascsaton dAShne Aanaamasgnad oaads Soa dB pRArBb adi ab pnscsonoedaeo aadob Sadbbn adShae dbpsacaeNoBSsaodeASBOSASbaaASHane 19 Introduction TN 5250 Emulation permits a full screen full duplex connection from a PC to a remote AS 400 TN 5250 Emulation allows a PC to emulate either an IBM 3179 2 or IBM 3477FC terminal and gives the appearance of being logged in at a local terminal TN 5250 is a program that runs on top of the Telnet interface to communicate with IBM AS 400 mainframes There are two modes of operation for the TN5250 program IBM 3179 2 which is 24X 80 color and IBM 3477 FC which is 27X 132 color The emulation involves simulating the special IBM 5250 keyboard keys program function keys etc by mapping sequences of keystrokes from the PC keyboard into appropriate IBM 5250 control strings A keyboard mapping chart provides a description of the IBM 5250 keys supported a
52. list box next to the H ostnbwtton identifies the official name alias or IP Address of the host to which you are connecting Typein a hostrattiek on a hostnarethe list box If the name you entered is not vabi connection cannot be made an error message is displayed To add or delete host names from the drop down list box see M odifying a Host Recall List Profile Enter a profile name or select one from the drop dishhox If you select the Default profile the factory settings are loaded A If the profile you select has a hostname and or port number associated with it that DIFFERS from the hostname and or port you have entered manually your choices are overridden by those of the profile For more information see Profiles Port Enter a port number to be used for the connection The default port number is the standard Telnet port port 23 TN 3270 supports the use of command line conpectameters For more information see Command Line O ptions Modifying a Host Recall List The Connect dialog allows you to modify a list of hostnames To display this dialog click the Connect button in the TN3270 main window Adding Hostnames These step by step instructions explain how to add a hostname to the host recall list in the drop down list box in the Connect dialog 1 After the Edit Host Recall List dialog appears do one of the following e Adda single hostname e Typea hostname in the Add Host to the Recall List field and c
53. of the network card If grayed out this typically means the DMA channel is either not used or is configured automatically by the software on the network card Refer to the network card documentation for further information 137 Century TCP Memory Address Interface PC Name PC IP Address Subnet M ask Domain Name Default DNS Server Default Gateway Viewing TCP Activity To display the Transmission Control Protocol TCP activity for the current Century TCP session select View Statistics TCP 138 The base address of the memory buffer used for network data transfer if required The name of the PC on which Century TCP is installed The IP address of the PC on which Century TCP is installed The subnet mask identifies machines on the network and subnet The name of a group of machines on the network A domain name consists of a sequence of names separated by periods for example pcx ncd com The Default Domain N ame Server DNS is the address of the Domain Name Server used to maintain and resolve IP addresses The Default Gateway specifies which router should receive communication destined for addresses in another subnet or network The following describes each field that is displayed Connections Packets Logs the currently active TCP connections total TCP connections accepted connections by the host and connections that have been closed during this Century TCP session TCP network
54. on Startup allows FTP to execute automatically when TERM is started e Allow Anonymous Login allows clients to enter the server without a password e Starting Directory type the directory that should be accessed when the connection is made either manually or automatically To edit the hostmode users list select H ostmode Server and then click Edit TheM aintain Hostmode U serslialog box is displayed 69 TERM Professional Emulator Figure 27 TERM Professional Maintain Hostmode Users Dialog Box Maintain Hostmode Users Users lt Default Directory gt D gt lt c tmp gt To accept the user list pres amp NTER Or click on theOK Button To delete the currently selected name click on th lete Button To add a new user click on th dd Button To modify the currently selected user click on th odify Button To accept the new settings pres amp NTER Or click on theOK Button To reject the new settings pressSC Or click on theCance Button Changing General Settings SelectConfigure General TheG eneral Setupdialog boxis displayed Figure 28 TERM Professional General Setup Dialog Box Est Log File Name ffletog O Number of Colors fis z Language fengish SSCs Startup Flags fo Startup Script rts User Interface Options X Show Menu PX Display Splash IX Show Ribbon Bar IX Log Transfers X Show Session Bar X Display Error Boxes Save when exiting C Always Never Prompt
55. option to delete all or portions of the Connection History by selecting Edit Delete History Summary This screen summarizes how many attempts to connect were made verses how many times a connection was made The summary also displays how long the current connection has lasted Current Connection Click This Connection when a connection is active to view the summary of all sessions for the current connection This includes the start time duration and local IP address and host name provided by this connection 155 Century TCP Using the Dialer Menus The menu bar of the main Dialer window provides the following options e File e Edit e Options e Tools e Help Each of the options is explained in detail e File Save Changes Allows the saving of changes made in the Dialer sincethelast File Save Changes or last File Discard Changes Discard Changes Allows the deletion of changes made in the Dialer since the last File Save Changes or File Discard Changes Exit Exits the Dialer e Edit Cut Removes text selected within Dialer edit boxes and puts it on the Clipboard This command is available only when there is selected text The text remains on the Clipboard until replaced with new text Copy Copies text from the Dialer edit boxes and places it onto to the Clipboard This command is available only when there has been text selected The text remains on the Clipboard until replaced with new text Paste
56. powered on e If using a modem have the modem documentation available 1A list of commands that can be run to automate tasks such as connections logins and disconnects 143 Century TCP Information to Set up the Dialer When a connection is made to the host via a dedicated serial line or a modem the following information is necessary This information can be obtained from the System Administrator or the Internet provider e Modem type e Modem initialization string optional if defining anew modem e Modem speed also called baud rate e Phonenumber of the remote network access server including any dialing prefix and dialing suffix e Serial port where the dedicated line or the modem is attached to the PC e Serial port speed baud rate For the next four items it may be helpful to refer to the LAN Worksheet completed in the Getting Started section of this manual e Network protocol e Domain name service data optional e Static IP or PC address optional e Remote IP or Gateway address optional 144 Setting up the Dialer Starting the Dialer The Dialer is installed when the Century TCP network is installed Look for the Internet Dialer icon in the Century program group To run the Dialer double click on the Internet Dialer icon The first time the Dialer isrun the M ain Dialer window will be displayed as well as the first dialog presented by the Initial Setup Assistant Prior to using the Dial
57. profil evailable through the File menu or through the Connect dialog This allows settings to be changed quickly and easily letting you switch from one session to the next just by choosing a new profile If any changes are made to the loaded profile i e any of the above settings are modified you are prompted to save them whenever you attempt to load a different profile create a new one or exit the application A profile can also be deleted providing it is not currently in use by another instance of the application Help Menu Use this menu to obtain on line Help You have the following options on the Help menu Index Click this option to view the HE amp pble of Contents Using Help Click this option to get information about using on line H dp About TN 5250 Click this option see the version number of TN 5250 Context Sensitive Help To find out what each button does click the ee and click on the buttons in the Toolbar Exit on Disconnect If you are still connected to a remote host when you attempt obite asked if you want to first disconnect Selecting Yes disconnects you from the remote host and exits TN 5250 Selecting No brings you back to your TN 5250 screen Main Window In the main windows you actually enter your communications with the server You can use any of the keys on the keyboard or you can use the Auxiliary Keypad and Symbol Keypad 19 N etwork Connections Network Connections Getting Started M
58. prompts Represents a key combination such aSLT F1 This indicates you should hold the LT key and then press the 1 key italics Represent pathnames file names and command references within the text 0 Is a zero Is an uppercase letter oh E Represents the escape code Boldface Represents commands or options you should type exactly sample command prompt with a command appears below Al Represents theRETURN or ENTER key when located on a command line such as a setup Select item item item A menu selection hierarchy where each item is different anp available after making the previous selections Table P 2 Mouse Conventions Convention Description Point M ove the screen pointer by using the mouse Click Press the left mouse button Double Click Press the left mouse button twice in quick succession Drag Press the left mouse button and hold it while moving the mouse Preface Right Click Press the right mouse button xi TERM Professional Table P 3 G eneral Conventions Convention Description Use the mouse or the keyboard to move the highlight bar or focus Use the mouse click oRETURN key to activate the chosen selection Refers to on screen buttons Pressing involves selecting the button and then pushing it The keyboard involves TABbing and pressingRETURN The mouse involves pointing and pressing the left mouse button To Cancel PressESCAPE double click the window
59. remote system the ASCII value for a backspace or the ASC Malue for a delete VMS systems expect the DEC VT termina BACK SPAC Eto send the delete value When checkedthe BACKSPACE key sends the ASCII value for delete octal 177 31 TERM Professional Emulator e Block Mode Controls block mode operation of the WYSE 50 IBM 3101 and TeleVideo 912 925 and 950 emulations Checked uses block mode Unchecked uses line mode default e Use Alt Keys in Emulators Selects whether to use ALT keys for emulator reserved functions or to access the main menu e Use Numlocked Keypad Controls allowable toggling of the NumLock key within TERM Professional If checked the NumLock key will be on at all times If unchecked the N umLock key functions normally default 3 To accept the new settings pres amp NTER Or click on the OK Button To reject the new settings pressSC Or click on the Cancel Button Changing the Advanced Emulation Settings 32 1 From theE mulation Setupdialog box click on the dvanced button TheAdvanced E mulation Setupialog boxis displayed Figure 7 TERM Professional Advanced Emulation Setup Dialog Box OM 7101 715 Ternarownd Character xr Cx DEG WE Tem 10 Siig 00 Cim Casoel WAU Reqube Character 5 WRU Anpwotock B o F Adel Lindends F Mo Semen Scroting F Add Caniage Retuma T ignon Graphace Parity Ba S Du ne Evvetation Sem ex T 922 Cotsen Mode Lisos 42 Comers B9 e IBM 310 3151T urnaroun
60. should not be displayed when the network is down select Disable warning when network is not running 6 Select Restore all connections at Startupif all connections are to be restored each time Windows is started All connections will be restored if this option is selected 7 Select OK Configuring Network Drives Verify that the authentication server has been set up prior to connecting to NFS network drives tng the Authenticator on the previous page To configure default settings used when connecting to network drives 1 Select Control Panel Network or Control Panel Network PC NFS on a Windows for Workgroups network The Century NFS Network Configuration dialog displays 2 Select Drives Defining The User Name and Password Every user on a PCN FS server is assigned a user name The user name is how the server identifies the user authentication and how the server assigns ownership to the files which the user created see File Permissions on page 196 200 NFS Client Century NFS allows the specification of a user name that identifies the user in every network file operation The user name and password set in the Drives tab are the default user name and passw ord used to authenticate the N FS drive connections 1 5 Select Control Panel Network or Control Panel Network PC NFS on a Windows for Workgroups network The Century NFS Network Configuration dialog is displayed Select Drives Enter
61. special foreign characters which are usually available over 8 bit connections This option effects only the VT 320 7 or VT 220 7 emulation selections Display Dim Attribute as Click on the down arrow to display possible values This option affects only the WYSE50 and WYSE60 emulations It controls how TERM Professional should display characters with the dim attribute Options include NORMAL Dim characters will be displayed in the same color asrmal characters REVERSE Dim characters will be displayed in the reverse color DIM Dim characters will be displayed in the low intensity color of the normal color and normal characters will be displayed in their high intensity colors Scrollback Buffer Lines This is an edit field which defines the number of previously viewed lines to be saved in terminal mode This allows scrohlg backward and forward to see data which has already scrollesh thescreen The maximum number of lines which can be defined is 200 If the number of linesis changed the changes are not in effect untihe configurationis saved and reloaded End of Line Wrap Controls whether the selected emulation automatically linefeeds when a character is typed in the last column Chetkg this boxcauses the cursor to move to the first column of the next lind his box left unchecked causes the cursor to remain in the last column until a carriage return is received BACKSPACE Key Sends DELETE Selects what the BACK SPAC Key sends to the
62. the modem documentation for more specific details Modem switch settings While theH ayes dialer protocol has become the de facto industry standard the way to set default switch settings vary greatly External modems generally have a set of switches that control various modem defaults Internal modems will either have these switches physically on the card or programmable from the operating system Whichever way the modem is configured the following table lists the required settings for correct operation witRM Professional Table 1 Modem Switch Settings Verbose verbose replies Quiet send result codes Echo no character echo DCD respond b DCD Line RJ 11 single line CmdRec the modem should listen to commands AT Set use Hayes command set TERM Professional Common modem commands The following table is provided as a convenience For a complete list of commands compatible with the modem please refer to the modem manual Table 2 CommonHayes Modem Commands Prefix Function AT Attention code This must precede all commands except A and Command Function Force answer mode command The modem will answer the phone even if it has not received a call Re execute last command This executes the last command sent to the modem This command does not require the AT prefix Dial command This command places the modem in originate mode and then dials the dialing string that follows Hang up command This disconnects the m
63. the modifier state of the PC Keyboard as required by simply checking the modifier check boxes Also select the PC key to which the Protocol key is to be mapped For example if you want to map a Protocol key to lt Shift gt lt F1 gt on your PC keyboard then check only the Shift check box and select the F1 key from the PC keyboard List Box Profile U pdate O ptions e Click Push Button 1 to map the selected Protocol key to the selected PC key The PC keyboard List Box is updated to reflect the new mapping Erase Button The steps tainmap an existing mapping are as follows e Select the PC key which is to be unmapped e Click on the Erase button The PC keyboard List Box is updated to reflect the new state of the modifiers Mapping a Protocol Key to a PC Key Any protocol key can be mapped to any PC key The steps for mappingprotocol key to a PC key areas follows e Select the modifier state of the PC keyboard as required by simply clicking on the modifiers For example if you want to map the Protocol key to lt Shift gt lt F1 gt of you PC keyboard then click on the lt Shift gt key on the PC keyboard 12 e Click with the left mouse button on the desired Protocol key drag it over the PC key to which you want to map the Protocol key and drop it The cursor changes states to indicate whether a drop is possible or not You can t drop as long as the cursor is in a no drop state You can drop a Ratocol key over a PC key only when th
64. the window is closed Advanced Topics This section focuses on the more technical aspects of FTP such as e How FTP works e How to build a host list file with the Edit Known Hosts command e How to use the output window to track progress or find errors How FTP Works The FTP application takes simple Windows actions such as double click or drag and drop and translates them into standard FTP commands that a host understands For example when a double click is performed on the top directory in the remote host s drive window a file list must be built To build the file list FTP sends a command to the remote host and gets a reply containing the host s file list and associated details It s the equivalent of sending the UN IX command Is from the PC This interaction with the remote host can take time especially if the host is halfway around the world A double click may not bring the instantaneous response expected from Windows This interaction can be monitored by checking the FTP Output window FTP logs every command it sends and every response it receives in the output window Read the contents of the output window to see what goes on behind the scenes 207 N etwork Applications Keeping Track of Hosts and Connections To create a connection to a remote host FTP requires the entry of the host s name but not its IP address M ost networks use a service such as DNS domain name 208 Century FTP services to provi
65. to the DOS file name A commais an invalid filename character in DOS e Any extension present in the original file name is preserved in the mapping e g a SA LES EXE file on DOS becomes sales exe on UNIX e A leading period is invalid in a DOS file name therefore the period is discarded e Morethan one period in a DOS file name is invalid The first leftmost period is used and the second period is discarded 211 Century NFS e If the name is longer than 8 3 characters eight characters a period then a three letter extension in mapping a file N FS uses the first four characters of the original file namein uppercase The fifth character becomes a tilde e Thesixth and seventh characters contain the hexadecimal characters generated to map each name uniquely e Theeighth character is used to keep a checksum character to verify the name mapping cache The following table lists name mapping examples Table 5 UNIX DOS File Name Translation UNIX File Name Translated DOS Name Remarks test1 123 TEST1 123 Extension preserved Test1 abc TEST 018 ABC Translates the first four characters Tilde points to the mapping Hexadecimal is for internal use Extension preserved TEST 02F Translates the first four characters Tilde points to mapping Hexadecimal is for internal use No extension T 034 Translates the first character Tildes point to mapping Hexadecimal is for internal use No extension 212 NFS
66. transfer screen The following screen will then be displayed Send Receive Request I Exit after Transfer I Use Registered Apps after Transfer I Run Minimized X Display Transfer Status Screen ET ECR aa BF End of Teanstes Acknoniedge Exteel Receive Protocol fad Maximum Consecutive Bad Packets fi 0 Restarts TERMCRC WTERMCRC fo X Automatic Data Compression Convert Filenames to Uppercase l Remote TERMCRC Control Post Transfer Script TERM Professional Emulator Settings Auto File Transfer If this box is checked the file transfer will begin sending raamg or requesting file information whenever TERM is initiated e Exit After Transfer This option will exit TERM after the transfer is complete Use Registered A pps After Transfer When receiving files that have a registered extension i e doc for Word this option when checked will instruct Windows to launch the appropriate application software The extensions and the associated application programs are set up within Windows Run Minimized By checking this box the transfer function screen wh minimized during the actual transfer This allows other functions to be performed while the transfer is taking place e Display Transfer Status Screen This checkbox selects whether to display the file transfer status screen During file transfers a status screen is displayed to keep you updated on the condition of the tra
67. transmit a packet matches the ACK transmission delay time A zero entry sets this field to the default The KERMIT Options group Alternate Checksum This checkbox selects the new unchecked or the old checked version of KERMIT checksum generation Older versions of KERMIT usea different error checking method If you are communicating with an older version you may need this checked Echo Packets This checkbox selects whether to echo received packets to the screen Check this box todisplayall packets to the screen as they are received EOL Character This is an edit field for the numeric ASCII value of the End Of Line Character It defaults to 13 which is the Carriage Return TERM Professional Emulator 4 TheNone rror Checked group e Waitfor ACK This edit field sets the number of seconds TERM waits for an XON or ACK during ASCII and Line transfers TERM will timeout if an XON or ACK is not received within the specified period of time D efault of zero means TERM will not timeout e Line Acknowledge This edit field defines the acknowledge character during Line sends The acknowledge character signals readiness to send another line out the communications line T he default character is the linefeed character n e Line Delay msec This edit field sets the amount of time TERM should delay after each linefeed character is sent down the communications line The default value is 0 which means no delay If you are communica
68. 1 F4 EOP EOS eypad 0 Keypad 9 els 0 K eypad 9 0 9 EA EB EC ED Application Mode Keypad 0 Keypad 9 Keypad 0 K eypad 9 EOp EOy Keypad Keypad EOm Keypad Keypad EOI Keypad Keypad EOn Keypad Enter Keypad Enter EOM Local Print Sequences The DEC VT100 uses the following sequences E 5i E 4i Off E 4i i l 113 TinyTERM Emulator DEC VT320 VT220 Emulations Description The DEC VT320 and DEC VT220 emulations are full featured DEC compatible emulations with M ultinational Character Set support All VT320 and VT220 escape sequences are processed including graphics characters transparent print and numeric keypad support Each emulation has a 7 emulation option as well This selects the appropriate terminal emulation with N ational Replacement Character Set support The NRCS is determined by the Character Set field in the emulation setup screen This option should be used over 7 data bit connections Keyboard Layout 114 The following keys perform specific hardware functions and cannot be emulated Hold Screen use Ctrl S Ctrl Q Print Screen use the Print key Set Up Data Talk e Break use the Break key Table 4 DEC VT320 VT220 Keyboard Layout VT320 VT220 Keyboard IBM PC Keyboard PF1 PF4 F1 F4 F6 F10 F6 F10 11 F11 or Ctrl F 1 12 F12 or Ctrl F2 F13 F14 Ctrl 3 Ctrl 4 elp Ctrl F5 Do Ctrl F6 Ctrl F 7 Ctrl F10 7 4 ER
69. 3 bits as 1 1 0 the next 21 bits define the network and the latter 8 bits define the hosts This allows up to 2 097 152 class C networks Table 4 Class C Networks Address Range Status 192 0 0 0 Reserved 192 0 1 0 through 223 255 254 0 Available 223 255 255 0 Reserved Class D Networks As shown below class D networks use the uppermost 4 bits as 1 1 1 0 The remaining 28 bits are used for multicast groups of computers RFC 988 explains multicast groups Table 5 Class D Networks Address Range Status 224 0 0 0 through 255 255 255 254 Reserved Class E Networks As shown below class E networks use the uppermost 4 bits as 1 1 1 1 Class E networks are reserved for future use The only class E address currently used is 255 255 255 255 which is a global broadcast address Broadcast Addresses The broadcast address is an address common to all nodes on a network The broadcast address has the host bits set to ones In a non subnetted network the broadcast address is 255 in each host field Data sent to the broadcast address is received by all hosts on the network and is equivalent to sending data directly to each network host 189 Century TCP Subnets and Subnet Masks Subnets Subnets are logical subsections of a single network Subnets are created for administrative or technical reasons isolating similar network traffic or similar network technology to one area of the network RFC950 explains the Internet Standard Subne
70. 32 cables Although the RS 232 standard imposes an official limit of 50 feet on RS 232 cables in practice they can be much longer The maximum workable length is dependent on baud rate According tM cN amara echnical Aspects of Data CommunicationsD igital Press 1982 the following distances have been determined as shown in Table 6 Table7 RS 232 Cable Distance Limits Baud Rate Shielded Cable Unshielded Cable 101 Network Connections Network Connections n This Section BAPI Bridge Application Program Interface BIOS Interrupt 14h INT14h Interfaces NetBIOS and MSNET Interfaces Virtual Circuits Configuration Novell NetWare for UNIX or SCO IPX SPX Windows Sockets TERM Professionalprovides direct network support for Beame andWhiteside BW TCP FTP Software PC TCP Novell LANWorkPlace for DOS Microsoft LAN M anager Microsoft N etworks Sun PC NFS Wollongong Pathway In addition to direct suppor ERM Professionabupports three standard network application interfaces e INT14h e NetBIOS e Windows Socket API By supporting these standard interfaceSERM Professionakan be used with many other networks including e NetM anageChameleonN FS e Racal Interlan Wollongong WIN TCP The following sections contain information that may be helpful in running TERM Professionalover the network 99 TERM Professional BAPI Bridge Application Program Interface TERM Professionakan connect to networks which support t
71. 32 columns label line and 25 line mode WYSE60 25 WYSE WY 60 terminal emulation 25 line mode Automatically selects 25 line mode WYSE50 WYSE WY 50 terminal emulation Duplex M ode Click on the down arrow to display available options Click on the duplex mode desired FULL In full duplex mode characters typed on the local keyboard are echoed to the screen by the remote system not by the terminal itself Full duplex mode is the default HALF Characters typed are immediately displayed on the screen before being sent over the communications line This is sometimes called local echo Another difference between half duplex and full duplex is the actual transmission of the data With half duplex the data is transmitted only one way at a time With full duplex data is passed in both directions at the same time Screen Pages Click the down arrow to display possible values Each terminal emulation supports multiple screen memory pages for use with programs like M screen and DigiScreen which provide multiple sessions over a single connection TERM Professional Emulator Screen pages are allocated upon opening a configuration changing screen pages on an open configuration requires reopening the configuration National Replacement Char Set Click on the down arrow to display possible values The DEC VT320 and VT220 terminals support an alternate character set when used over a 7 bit data connection This allows displaying of
72. 40 If Century TCP was installed for Lcoal Area N etwork LAN and serial port modem connections the option is given to switch between the two communication methods If Century TCP was installed for serial port modem connections only only serial communications will be allowed and this chapter does not apply If LAN connections are desired and only serial connections were installed reinstall Plus N FS and select the LAN interface Seethe Specifying Installation Parameters section in this manual N etwork Connections Communication Method Determining the Communication Method The Century program group contains a N etwork Switcher icon that states which communication method is currently used The icon will be switched to the communication method currently selected 1 Double click the N etwork Switcher icon A dialog displays showing the current network communication method and asking if the configuration should be switched 2 Click YES to change the communication method A dialog displays stating that the change will take effect after Windows is restarted 3 Choose one of the following selections Click YES to restart Windows immediately Click NO if other applications need to be closed prior to restarting Windows Any open applications should be closed then Windows should be terminated and restarted The first time the communication switch is changed to serial port modem the Century TCP dialer will also need to be con
73. 5 Century TCP e f the modem is properly connected the H ayes Compatible modem may not be 100 compatible Change the Initialize string in Modem Modem Control Strings dialog to values that are correct for the modem as defined in the modem documentation The modem disconnects immediately after it makes a connection and begins to redial The modem is timing out and aborting the dial Increase the modem wait for timeout Refer to the modem documentation for specific instructions on timeouts The modem connection was successful but communication is very slow Transmission errors may be occurring due to a noisy phone line When this happens the modem must continually resend data which slows the actual throughput To solve this problem try hanging up and reconnecting If communication is still very slow try increasing the modem baud rateinthe COM Port tab N ext try selecting PCMCIA Modem in the M odem tab The modem connection was successful but the modem suddenly disconnects Does the telephone line have call waiting If so another call may have comein during the Century TCP connection Use a telephone line that does not have the call waiting function or contact the telephone company to find out how to disable call waiting IRQ Conflict 166 The modem and another device in the computer have the same Interrupt Request Line IRQ Look atthe Windows COM portsettingsinthe Control Panel If there are two COM ports wi
74. B carat x5E backslash x5C double quote x22 single quote x27 dash x2D x hex value follows 0 7 octal value follows TERM Professional Environment Variables Environment variables can be used to modify the operation of TERM Professional and are defined using the DOS SET command The variables that may be changed are the same as those found in th onfigurationmenu Itis recommended that the Configuration menu be used to make necessary changes For example at the DOS prompt type C SET HOME C MYDIR to define the TTDIR variable For alist of current environment variables type SET without any options HOME If this variable is set it will override the default search path when checking for the tap file TERMRC This variable is the fulbathname of TERM Professional s user runtime command startup file which is always executed after thedp file This file is normally namedW TERM RC TTPRO RC USER This variable determines whaiogin name is used in arrlogin network connection If this variable is not set TERM Professional uses root as bhgin name 70 Transferring Files n This Section File Transfer Protocols Using File Transfer Xmodem XmodemCRC Ymodem and Zmodem EMail Protocol FTP Restarting Interrupted Transfers File Transfer Protocols Not only must an effective communications software tool support exact emulations it also must support a reliable way to transf
75. Client Troubleshooting Cannot connect to the network using NFS Have you set up your user authentication properly See Setting the Authenticator on page 199 Be sure that the authentication server is running PCNFSD version See Determining the PCNFSD version on the server on page 213 A drive does not appear in the Mountable Directories list The host selected in File Manager Disk Connect Network Drive Browse NFS Hosts or File Manager Disk Connect Network Drive PC NFS Browse NFS Hosts has not exported the drive for mounting A host does not appear in the browsed host list The File Manager Disk Connect Network Drive Browseor File Manager Disk Connect Network Drive PC NFS Browsebrings up a dialog that browses machines for network mountable drives It does not browse the network for NFS capable hosts To mount drives from a host that does not appear in NFS Hosts enter the host name in Host Selected and press Return Determining the PCNFSD version on the server For Century NFS the PCNFSD version must be 2 If using a UNIX host run rpcinfo p and examine the version field of pcnfsd Files created by you on network drives are not owned by you Created files carry the user id and group id as known by the authenticator server Each machine on the network should have the same user id and group id If the user or group id is different on different hosts files created by the user will be owned by someo
76. DISPLAY NODISPLAY WRITE_SUPER WRITE_WRITE WRITE_READ WRITE_NONE SUPER_WRITE READ _WRITE NOKEY KEY nnnnnnnn HLLAPI Functions The following functions are not supported by CENTURY S HLLAPI the number of the function is in parentheses Window Services Functions Connect Window Services 101 Disconnect Window Services 102 Query Window Coordinates 103 Window Status 104 Close Intercept Services Start Close Intercept 41 Query Close Intercept 42 Stop Close Intercept 43 Keystroke Intercept Services Start Keystroke Intercept 50 Get Key 51 Post Intercept Status 52 Stop Keystroke Intercept 53 Miscellaneous Copy OIA 13 WinHLLAPIAsync CENTURY S HLLAPI does not support the asynchronous implementations of the HLLAPI functions File Transfer There appears to be no consensus among the different HLLAPI specifications about how send receive file are to be implemented CENTURY S HLLAPI is different frowiinHLLAPI in that the remote file name must be enclosed between double quotes Profile INTRODUCTION CONNECTING TO AREMOTE HOST CONNECTING TO AREMOTE HOST USING YOUR NETWORK TO WHAT SHOULDI SET MY MODEM PARAMETERS SAVING APROFILE DETERRING SA PROBIE en n e A case E a a A Te TEAC SUSU Ste Ree eae eae SSeS 4 OPENING N21 N00 2 1 235 anast aces hoe E A E A E A E E E S A E 4 CREATING ANEW PROFILE Introduction A profile stores a set of configuration parameters to customize your con
77. Emulator Professional then displays Windows Help on the keywords from the entry dialog ToolTips Controls ToolTips balloon help display status When this item is checked ToolTips are displayed When unchecked ToolTips are not displayed 19 TERM Professional Emulator About 1CONect Describes the function of the ICON ect selections in tid emenu The ICON ect options allow the maintenance of the configuration files TERM Professional uses when connections are made About TERM Displays the TERM Professional copyright dialog which includes version information Auto Register TERM TERM Professional may be registered electronically by filling in the requested information with the Auto Register function Ribbon Bar From the main menu all of TERM Professional s functions may be controlled In addition many of TERM Professional s important features are quickly available from the Ribbon Bar 20 Figure 3 TERM Professional s Ribbon Bar oft 2 20 ol S181 21S The following list explains the buttons on the Ribbon Bar listed from left to right Connect Connects using the settings of the tap file currently in use If already connected the connection will be dropped and a new connection will be made Discon Disconnects the current connection Open Open a tap file Save Save current configuration into the tap and system files Transfer Brings up the Transfer File dialog box Comm Configure
78. GEDN e The Reset All button Clicking this button resets all key values to the TERM Professional default setting e The Keyboard All keys on the keyboard accept several actions Any key or character can be dragged and dropped on any other key to change the destination key to send the sequence of the source key For example the T key may be dragged and dropped on the S key The TERM Professional Emulator result would be that the S key has been made a T key The label on the destination key will change to the new value and the font will be bold to show that the key has been changed Any key can be clicked on and the keyname will appear in the Keyname list box for manual editing The new keyname will then be used as the label for the key If theALT SHIFT or CTRL keys are clicked the keyboard will redraw to display the keys modified by thALT SHIFT or CTRL keys Combinations ofSHIFT and CTRL can be used Keys that do not display a value do not have default key mappings The Keyname pop up list box This field allows selection of a keyname to be mapped Click on the down arrow for this field to display a list of possible keys to edit The Action pup up list box This field lists the action associated with the selected key RESET indicates that the selected key is set to the default value MACRO indicates that the key is mapped to send a string mapped to a different TERM Professional Char
79. L S CTRL Q XO N XOFF handshake that can be performed in software If both types of handshaking are used the entire conversation between computer and modem might look like this where a plus sign signifies raising the voltage on the line and a minus sign signifies dropping the voltage 97 TERM Professional 98 Table 5 Conversation Between Computer and Modem Device Signal Meaning want to call another system Are you ready Yes l m ready Go ahead and dial I ve got your party sir Can I send data now Sure Go ahead Data sent out Data Received Previous four steps may be repeated with either device in the sending role I m done Please hang up Whatever you say All of the above sounds good in theory but in practice it will not always work Connecting a computer to a modem is generally easy since aD TE to DCE connection is what RS 232 was made for A straight through cable connecting pins 1 through 8 and 20 or all 25 pins will usually do the trick Things can get quite a bit more complicated for a direct connection between two computers Just as the function of pins 2 and 3 is asymmetrical between DTE and DCE devices so too is the function of pins 6 8and 20 A DTE device a computer or terminal asserts DTR pin 20 and expects to receive DSR pin 6 and DCD D ata Carrier D etect A DCE device a modem asserts DSR and DCD and expects to receive DTR If two DTE devices are connected with a straigh
80. ME command is used as follows NETVTNAME string string This is the coded virtual terminal name s is used to mtthe user specified name For example amp VT means take the user specified node name and follow it with a VT to create the virtual terminal server name for thi SN etN etBIOS call command The NETDIALOG command 102 The NETDIALOG command controls the handshaking required after the M SN etN etBIOS call command completes in order for the VT server to grant a virtual terminal line The NETDIALOG command is used as follows NETDIALOG string string This is the handshaking string which determines what is sent and what is expected to be received This string supports the following B Send a break character F Clear the receive character buffer before proceeding K Send the next character as a Control character For example to send a Control B instead of a break character use KB S TERM Professionalwaits for the characters between each S before continuing with the string W Wait one second before processing the rest of the string Z Send a null character Network Connections The NETNAME command The NETNAME command sets the local LAN adapter name for MSNETNetBIOS The default value is TN followed ERM Professionats 6 digit serial number For example if thEERM Professionaberial number were WTN 012345TT the local LAN adapter name would be TN 012345 This does not usually need adjusting T
81. RD PCXNET_INT 0x60 NETWORK_CARDis replaced with the network card driver name 172 Using M ultipleN etwork Protocols Century TCP NDIS and IBM LAN Support IEEE 802 2 amp NetBIOS CONFIG SYS DEVICE C CENTURY PROTMAN DOS I C CENTURY DEVICE C NDIS_DRIVER DOS DEVICE C LSP DXMAOMOD SYS 001 DEVICE C LSP DXMEOMOD SYS_ 12 1 DEVICE C LSP DXMTOMOD SYS E O N CF Y DEVICE C CENTURY MAR_NDIS DOS Table 2IBM LAN Parameter Reference Driver Parameter Purpose DXMAOMOD SYS 001 Defines U S English as the language for load time messages DXMEOMOD SYS_ 12 Gives a 12KB work space for the network card adapter 1 Transmits Ethernet DIX Version 2 0 frames with swapping address bits DXMTOMOD SYS E Enables the network adapter for simultaneous use with an asynchronous adapter O N Delays the NetBIOS network adapter open until NETBIND is run in AUTOEXECBAT CF Y Prevents an application program from intercepting the interrupt issued by the NetBIOS driver NDIS_DRIVER DOSis replaced with the network card driver name AUTOEXEC BAT C CENTURY NETBIND COM PATH C CENTURY PATH 173 Century TCP PROTOCOL INI PROTMAN_ MOD DRIVERNAME PROTMAN DXMAIDXCFG DXMEO_NIF DXMEO NIF DXMEO_NIF DRIVERNAME DXMEO BINDINGS NETWORK_CARD NETWORK_CARD DRIVERNAME DRIVER MAR_NDIS DRIVERNAME MAR_NDI BINDINGS NETWORK_CARD PCXNET_INT 0x60 NETWORK_CARD is replaced with the network card driver name Cent
82. RM Professional Emulator Changing Advanced Code Page Settings 66 The options found in this function allow the changing of the value of individual keys for existing Code Pages 1 From the Code Page Settings dialog box click thelvanced button TheCode Page to Editdialog box is then displayed Figure 24 TERM Professional Code Page to Edit Dialog Box Code Page Selection Cie m2 BEJ MS DOS Freeot Costs BiS MSDOS Monde 1250 Wiedhewts Latin Costa Ewepe 1251 Wisdomr Cystic Sleva 1252 Wiadess Lant ANSI ISQAEC 8859 5 Letin T prike 5 ISO 8859 5 Coville ISD 8859 7 Dieet F ispat Recern Keybomd Reszian Mummatve Ratsian ANSI C Output Tranceat Yaben Peszian 01 8 2 In theCode Page Selectionist box select the code page to edit Input Receive and K eyboard code pages may be selected by clicking the Input Radio button Output Transmit and Video code pagamay be selected by clicking the Output radio button 3 To Edit the code page pres amp NTER or click theEdit button To return to the Code Page Settings Dialog without editing pr ssc or click the Cancel button If Edit is selected from the Code Page to Edit dialog box tiditing Code Page dialog box is displayed Figure 25 TERM Professional Editing Code Page Dialog Box Code Page to Tere Obmaoter Sot Mappiag Cs J o t rear Fine ex Deveriotion er M5005 Lawn US T Setid aremece table TERM Professional Emu
83. Reboot the PC to ensure that the pre existing configuration is correct If there are problems with the pre existing configuration refer to the user s manual for that particular network 177 ExampleN DIS and ODI Configurations Example NDIS and ODI Configurations n This Section NDIS Configuration for Microsoft Windows 3 1 179 NDIS Configuration for Microsoft Windows for Workgroups N etwork 180 NDIS Version 3 Enhanced Mode NDIS Driver 181 ODI Configuration for Microsoft Windows 3 1 182 ODI Configuration for Microsoft Windows for Workgroups Network 182 Token Rings and Source Routing 184 NDIS Configuration for Microsoft Windows 3 1 The following is an example N DIS Century configuration for Microsoft Windows These configurations do not apply to Windows 95 users the configuration changes made using Windows 95 are made to Windows files automatically NDIS_ DRV DOSisa place holder for the specific network card N DIS driver CONFIG SYS LASTDRIVE Z DEVICE C CENTURY PROTMAN DOS I C CENTURY DEVICE C CENTURY NDIS_DRV DOS DEVICE C CENTURY MAR_NDIS DOS AUTOEXEC BAT C CENTURY NETBIND COM PATH C CENTURY PATH 179 Century TCP C CENTURY PROTOCOL INI NDIS_ DRIVER DRIVERNAME NDIS_ DRV MAR_NDIS DRIVERNAME MAR_NDI BINDINGS NDIS_ DRIVER PCXNET_INT 0X60 NDIS Configuration for Microsoft Windows for Workgroups Network NDIS Version 2 Real Mode or Real and Enhanced Mode Driver Here is the same N
84. S 232 connectors usually referred to as serial ports However the RS 232 standard is very broad so these ports are not configured identically on all systems RS 232 was originally designed for communications between terminals and modems These two types of equipment are referred to in the standard as data terminal equipment DTE and data communications equipment DCE M ost but not all computers are DTE Terminals are always DTE Modems are always DCE Usually a serial port on a DTE uses a 25 pin male connector while a serial port on aDCE uses a 25 pin female connector M ost of the wires in the cable are defined as control lines Only two of the wires those connected to pins 2 and 3 are actually used for data transmission DTE sends out data on pin 2 and DCE expects to receive it there DCE sends out data on pin 3 and DTE expects to receive it there If making a connection directly between DTE and DCE as expected by the RS 232 standard then use atraight througiRS 232 cable However to establish a direct connection between two computers with DTE ports thenwl modem cable must be used in which the wires connecting pins 2 and 3 are crossed This Serial and M odem Connections type of cable forces the two DTE connections into accepting one as a DCE connection 93 TERM Professional Both straight through and null modem cables are widely available These cables should be available from the system manufacturer or at most com
85. Saves network configuration changes Enable SN MP If checked Century TCP provides SNMP MIB II information The default state is unchecked off Update Status Sets the update rate for the Statistics tabs Always on Top If checked the Century TCP configuration utility window is always on top of other windows on the desktop Minimized at Startup If checked the Century TCP configuration utility starts with a minimized window icon Exit Prompts to save any configuration changes and then terminates the Century TCP configuration utility Help Menu Provides on line help and describes the Century TCP network configuration utility View Tab Displays hardware and interface information and network transmission statistics Configure Tab Allows the configuration of the Network Card PC Name IP Addresses Gateways DNS and Hosts File Ping Tab Tests the network Status Line Displays quick explanations for items pointed to with the cursor Network Serial Status Line States whether or not the network is working N etwork Connections Modifying Network Configurations The Century TCP configuration utility allows the modification of how Century TCP is configured If the entries in this section are not understood contact the System Administrator for further information M odifying one of these parameters incorrectly can cause the Century network to cease functioning LAN Connections If using a LAN connection e Configure
86. Selected To cancel all owned print jobs 1 2 3 4 Select a printer icon from the Printers Icon Bar Select Status Click Remote Click Remove All Viewing Print Status Viewing Local Queue Status The local queue contains print jobs that have not been sent to the remote printer To view the local queue status 233 N amp work A pplications 1 2 3 Select a printer icon from the Printers Icon Bar Select Status Click Local Viewing Remote Queue Status The remote queue contains jobs queued on the remote machine To view the remote queue status 1 Selecta printer icon fromthe Printers Icon Bar 2 Select Status 3 Click Remote Refreshing the Printer Queue Status Window To automatically refresh the Printer Queue Status window at regular intervals 1 2 3 4 Select a printer icon from the Printers Icon Bar Select Configure On Screen Click Refresh manually to remove the check In Every X secs type the number of seconds time lapse to refresh the window The Printer Queue Status can be refreshed manually even after it has been set up to refresh automatically Just click Refresh in Status Advanced Topics Quick Menu Move the mouse to a printer icon in the Printers Icon Bar Hold down the right mouse button The following menu appears 234 Create D esktop Icon D elete Printer Properties M ake Default Printer Printing Files LPR Once an icon window has been created Cre
87. Servers option Select the correct host from the list displayed Select the correct printer displayed for the host Windows 3 1 Windows for Workgroups Selecting A Print Method Century supports three different methods including NFS to print files to network printers The method selected depends on the following Where the print file resides H ow the printer is enabled for the network Whether the files are printed from a PC application or from the File M anager Control Panel To use printing via NFS the printers must be made available to the network from NFS To determine whether the printer is available refer to Connecting to a Network Drive on page 205 207 Century NFS Restoring the Print Connection at Startup To restore the NFS printer connections when Microsoft Windows is started 1 3 4 Select Control Panel Networkor Control Panel Network PC NFSona Windows for Workgroups network The Century NFS Network Configuration dialog is displayed Select Printers Select Restore at Startup Click OK Printing a Banner Page To printa 3banner pageprior to printing the selected file 1 3 4 Select Control Panel Networkor Control Panel Network PC NFSon a Windows for Workgroups network The Century N etwork Configuration dialog is displayed Select Printers Select Banner Page Click OK Selecting the Spool Directory The spool directory is a temporary location for pri
88. Services item then click the OK button The Windows 95 Network dialog will then be displayed Highlight the Century Internet Services selection and select the Properties button Changing the Message Logging Levels To change the priority of the message logging level for LPD select the Properties button from the Windows 95 N etwork dialog then 1 5 Select the Services tab A list of managed services displays in the box Highlight the desired printer The Configuration window is then displayed Select Logging Choose the desired level the default is set to level 3 M essages are written to the system log file at the chosen level and below M essages with values greater than the chosen level are not posted For example if level 5 is selected levels 0 through 5 are posted to the system log file and levels 6 and 7 are not Click OK to accept the changes Customizing the Spooling Parameters To change where received print jobs are stored on the local machine select the Properties button from the Windows 95 N etwork dialog then 1 244 Select the Services tab A list of managed services displays in the box Highlight the desired printer then click the Configure button The Configuration window is then displayed M anaging N etwork Services 3 Select Spooling 4 Decide where to spool print jobs To spool print jobs to the directory path specified by the DOS environment s TEM P variable click Use loca
89. Software Inc TERM is a trademark of Century Software Inc MS DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation UNIX is a trademark of AT amp T DEC isa registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation VT320 VT 220 VT 100 and VT52 are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation H ayes is a registered trademark df ayes M icrocomputer Products Inc IBM is a registered trademark of International Business M achines Corporation PC is a trademark of International Business M achines Corporation Wyse 50 andWyse 60 are trademarks oW yse Technology All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Century Software Inc 5284 South Commerce Drive Suite C 134 Salt Lake City Utah 84107 USA Telephone 801 268 3088 Bulletin Board 801 266 0330 Fax 801 268 2772 N 8 1 Facts by FA X 800 FAX ADVICE Preface Table of Contents Getting Started Preface HOW To Use THiS G uide sssssssssssusonnusnnnnnunnnnnnnnnunannnnannnnanannnnannnnannnnnnnnnanannnnan nana vii Conventions Used in This G uid e s sssssssssnsusunnnnnnnnnunannnnannununnnnnnnnnnnannnnannnnanann vii Register The ProdU sssssssssssusnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnunannnnnnnnnannnnnnannanannnnannnnanannnnannanannnnannnnanann ix If Assistance is Required ssssssssssussnsusnnnunannnnannnnunnnnnnnnnanannnnannnnannnnannnnanannnnannanan nnna x Phone Support
90. Started Using FTP Features Advanced Topics Getting Started The Century FTP application allows the transferring of files between a personal computer and a host across a TC P IP network To transfer files with FTP just drag and drop the files the same way as done in the Microsoft Windows File M anager or Window Explorer Files may be transferred previewed renamed or deleted files as well as creating directories all within the same application What to Know Before Using FTP Before using FTP check the following What is the remote host name or IP address and what is a user name and password on that machine Known Proceed Unknown Contact the administrator for that host Will anonymous login capability be needed Yes Be sure to know the correct e mail address No Proceed Starting FTP The Century FTP application is installed automatically when TERM Professional is installed Look for the N etwork File Transfer icon in the Century program group N etwork A pplications 1 Torun FTP double click onthe startup icon The FTP main window displays as does the Century FTP Configuration Info dialog 2 Fill in the Configure tab For now just fill in the following e Description Enter a short description to help identify this connection For example Connection to host office Hostname Enter the name of a host with FTP capability For example office e UserName Enter the user name f
91. TERM Professional Preface Copyright N otice Copyright Century Software Inc 1996 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of Century Software Inc Century Software Inc makes no representations or warranties with respect to this product or the contents hereof This product including both software and this manual is sold as is and without any express warranty of any nature ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS HEREBY DISCLAIMED In no event shall Century Software Inc be liable for consequential damages even if Century Software Inc has been advised of the possibility of such damages Further Century Software Inc reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Century Software to notify any person or organization of such revision or changes Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 52 227 7013 Trademarks TinyTERM and TERMNET are registered trademarks of Century
92. TN3270 input and output The Windows HLLAPI Specification provides a standard programming interface to all 3270 emulation products The Century Software s HLLAPI 1 0 is based on the Windows HLLAPI Specification version 1 1 Tutorial The following topics give a brief introduction to using Century s HLLAPI This tutorial assumes you already know how to use HLLAPI functions e Writing a HLLAPI program e Enabling HLLAPI in TN3270 e Connecting your HLLAPI program to a HLLAPI enabled TN3270 session Reference The following topics describe a few differences between CENTURY S HLLAPI andWimHLLAPI specification e Multiple Sessions e Set Session Parameters e HLLAPI Functions e File Transfer A HLLAPI kit is available on our FTP siteftp ftp censoft com and the README with the kit describes any discrepancies betweeNWinHLLAPI and Century Software s HLLAPI The name of the kit is HLLAPI ZIP Writing a HLLAPI Program This introduction assumes you are familiar with the various HLLAPI function calls To use the functions in the CENTURY S HLLAPI library your program must first dynamically load the CENTURY S HLLAPI library and then get a pointer to the HLLAPI function The following C code sample demonstrates this process PHLLAPI pfnHllapi HINSTANCEhLib char pszDLLName EHLLAP32 DLL hLib LoadLibrarygszDLLName if hLib NULL Display and return error return pfnHllapi PHLLAPI GetProcAddress hLib hil
93. TS first then DNS TERM Professionabearches a HOSTS file for the machine name If not found TERM Professionalinstructs the DNS server to resolve the name TryonlyDNS TERM Professionainstructs the D NS server to resolve the name Tryonly HOSTS TERM Professionabearches a HOSTS file on the PC for the name Enter the name resolution information as requestesktup may request one or more of these items e ThePC s domain name and the DNS server s IP address For example a name ofpcx cen com may be entered with an address of 192 90 34 2 e Thedirectory path of a H O STS file If the directory is known for the HOSTS file enter that directory If the directory is not known click the Browse button to search for a directory or leave the directory blank to haveSetupcreate a HOSTS file 14D omain Name Server generally used by UNIX systems This must be set up by the System Administrator to be used 15HOSTS file this is set up by the System Administrator and must have the host name and the I P address for each computer with which you will communicate 1 If the Setup program finds afO DI device driver installed on the PC the directory where theet cfgfile is located will be requested Type the directory or clickBrowse to locate the file If the setup program determines that Windows f rorkgroups is running it will find the network card setup fro mnirol Panel Network If the network card has not been configured the install will pro
94. a bits see diagram below are added up A 1 or 0 is then added in the parity bit to make the number or 1s odd or even depending on the type of parity For example if a character sent has the binary value 1000101 and even parity is being used a 1 would be placed in the parity bit to make the number of 1s even However if the same character was sent under odd parity a 0 would be placed in the parity bit because the number of 1s is already odd When the data byte is received the computer adds up the number of Is including the parity bit and checks it against the parity being used For example if you had your parity set at odd and thus you sent a data byte with an odd number of ones a computer expecting even parity might send back an error message indicating the problem If you weren t sure why you received an error message you could then either resend the character or change your parity Of course in this case you would have to change your parity in order for your characters to go through Data bits Most connections use 8 data bits However some as displayed in the diagram below in the Stop bits section may only use 7 These are the bits which actually represent each character you are sending Stop bits Specify the number of stop bits here When a character is sent through a modem it is composed of a start bit 8 data bits a parity bit sometimes and between 1 and 2 stop bits These bits signal the end of the character Most of
95. a local terminal TN 3270 is a program that runs on top of the Telnet interface to communication with IBM mainframes The emulation involves simulating the special IBM 3270 keyboard keys program function keys etc by mapping sequences of keystrokes from the PC keyboard into appropriate IBM 3270 control strings A keyboard mapping chart provides a description of the IBM 3270 keys supported and their PC equivalent For more information see M apping the Keyboard There are five modes of operation for the TN 3270 program a dumb TTY mode and IBM 3278 2 3 4and 5 modes In TTY mode the application offers a minimally functioning terminal emulation that does not provide cursor addressing In any of the IBM 3278 modes the application acts like an IBM 3278 block mode EBCDIC terminal connected to an IBM 30xx mainframe through a terminal controller If the TN3270 program can t negotiate to IBM 3278 x mode it attempts to run in standard TTY mode Most IBM mainframe software is designed around use with a terminal from the IBM 3270 family The IBM 3270 family of terminals are smart terminals that have more local processing capability than a common ASCII type terminal They operate in a polled block mode environment and normally use the EBCDIC character set The following is a functional description of the operation of the IBM 3270 family of terminals TheIBM mainframe computer sends a screen full of text with embedded screen format control inf
96. a signal to the server alerting it to the fact that a request you have made isn t being honored Test Req Clicking the button sends a special test request to the server Sys Req Clicking this button creates a line at the bottom of the screen which isn t a part of any fidd On this line you can enter any command you know the server will recognize You need to be familiar with the server in order to know what commands you can use You can also enter nothing on this line which usually signals the server to return a system menu to you After you have finished entering you text or entering nothing click th iqfed button to send the line to the server and return back to a normal screen If you decide you don t want to send the line to the server hit the Error R eset key to return to the normal screen Roll Up Clicking this button sends a signal to the server to roll the screen up The server determines exactly where to start rolling up and how many lineto roll up Roll Down Clicking this button sends a signal to the server to roll the screen down The server determines exactly where to start rolling down and how many lineto roll down 17 About Keypad Click this button to get on line Help about using the auxiliary keypad Symbol Keypad On this keypad you can find foreigner characters not available on your keyboard Instead of having to know the hexadecimal values for the keys you can instead simply click on the key you want t
97. acter Set value or set to a TERM Professional function The value is displayed in the Value edit box The Value Edit box This edit box displays the value of a current key mapping The contents of the box can be changed to the desired value for the selected key The Set button Sets the value in the Value edit box to the selected key The Reset button Clicking this button resets the selected key to the default value The Clipboard The clipboard is a temporary holding area for keys and values The keys or values can be dragged to the clipboard then dragged to any other key or value For example the clipboard can be used to drag keys and values from modified keysALT SHIFT CTRL to unmodified keys and vice versa or to store the value of the keys when moving from the left to the right side of the screen 55 TERM Professional Emulator e The Value Viewer text box Keys and Values dropped in the Value Viewer text box will be appended to the value in the Value edit box This is useful for building long strings and values Changing Color Settings 56 This function can be used to change the default screen colors used on the terminal or monitor The color settings changed within this function will only be used by TERM Professional 1 SelectConfigure Color or click on theColor Setup button on theRibbon Bar TheColor Setupdialog box is displayed Figure 18 TERM Color Setup Dialog Box Mosat Coho EN e oc sae Bersee Coto
98. ad Enter Keypad Enter M Requires KEYBOARD EXTBIOS or IN T9 under DOS Local Print Sequences The WYSE WY 50 uses the following sequences On X off Aj 124 WYSE WY 60 Emulation Description Terminal Emulation Reference The WYSE WY 60 is a full featured native mode Wyse 60 emulation This emulation supports scan code mode on off sequences and extended keyboard support Keyboard Layout Table 8 WYSE WY 60 Keyboard Layout Wyse60 Keyboard F1 F2 F10 F11 F12 F13 F16 Shift F 1 Shift F2 Shift F10 Shift F11 Shift F 12 Shift F 13 Shift F 16 Tf gt lt Home Shift H ome PAGE Next IBM PC Keyboard Fl F2 F10 F11 or Ctrl F1 F12 or Ctri F2 Ctrl F3 Ctrl F6 Shift F 1 Shift F 2 Shift F 10 Shift F 11 or Ctrl Shift F 1 Shift F 12 or Ctrl Shift F 2 Ctrl Shift F3 Ctrl Shift F 6 MESE a Home Ctrl H ome Page Down Wyse60 Byte Sequence A r AA r ANr AJ Tr AK r AL r AO r A Nr Aa r Ai 5 Aj r Ak r A r Ao r K 3 Ale H XIE E EK 125 TinyTERM Emulator Table 8 WYSE WY 60 Keyboard Layout Continued Wyse60 IBM PC Wyse60 Keyboard Keyboard Byte Sequence PAGE Prev PageUp EJ Tab Tab Shift T ab Shift T ab EI Back Space Backspace H Ins Insert Eq Del Delete 177 Repl End Er INS Char Ctrl Page Down EQ INS Line Ctrl gt EE DEL Char Ctrl Page Up EW DEL Line Ctrl ER
99. advice given above may be insufficient Finding the right cable can be simple and straightforward Or it can be a seemingly hopeless task for which no one has the right advice Be sure to read the documentation for the devices to connect It may be difficult to translate the raw description given for each device into the information necessary to connect them to one another but perseverence will bring success The use of a device called a breakout box can be invaluable when trying to build a cable O ne can usually be picked up at any electronics supply store A good breakout box is expensive but worth the investment if building numerous cables The breakout box allows the relatively easy rearrangement of the wires in a cable for testing purposes and includdsEDs that display which signals are actually active at any point pin connectors 9 pin connectors are becoming increasingly common on many computers The pins on these connectors have the same function as those on the 25 pin connector but of course they fall in different positions Table 5 shows imouts for the 9 pin connector on the IBM PC AT Thisis a DTE connector Table 6 9 Pin DTE Connector Pin Function Data Carrier D etect DCD Receive Data RD Transmit D ata TD Data Terminal Ready DTR Signal G round GND Data Set Ready DSR Request to Send RTS Clear to Send CTS Ring Indicator RI i 6 N Serial and M odem Connections Distance limits for RS 2
100. alogue to terminate in an ACK Acknowledge or a NAK Not Acknowledge response Four seconds per packet over along transfer is a very long time for the computer to sit idle The sliding window protocols such as WTERMCRC and Zmodem send several packets without waiting for a response on each packet This is called streaming TheACK and NAK responses of the receiving program include a packet number so the sending program can determine which packets were received correctly and which packets need to be resent The number of packets sent before waiting for a response is called a window Typically the window does not fill up so the sending computer has very little time to sit idle while waiting for a response The streaming capability is ideal for situations such as satellite or other links with noticeable delays between the host sending a packet and the remote receiving it WTERMCRC and Zmodem have the capability of adjusting packet length and window size Adjusting the window size is called sliding window The capability to adjust packet length and window size is ideal for situations such as noisy communications lines where the optimal packet size may change during the transfer 77 TinyTERM Emulator TinyTERM monitors the received data for acknowledgments and line garbage characters If the outstanding data reaches the window size limit all transmission stops awaiting the first ACK outstanding If line garbage characters are read past a c
101. an be changed to send something else like X Control letter X There are a few reasons a key such as F1 might be changed Some software applications incorrectly interpret key sequences If the VT 220 emulation is used an1 is pressed the sequence EOP is sent to the host computer But what if the remote computer thinks it should receive EO The host application cannot be changed but TERM Professional can be changed TERM Professional is flexible enough to allow the value of thre key may be changed from EOP to EOJ so the application can be used e Key values may be changed to provide short cuts If the same system is connected to everyday keys can be set as thegin and the password At the host system slogin prompt simply press the key assigned as t egin key Similarly at the password prompt press the password key These changes are accomplished by using the KeyboaRkmapper in the TERM Professional configurmenu described in the uided Tour TERM Professional section of this manual Quoted strings Most of TERM Professional s edit fields such as the configuration file support special characters A string may contain any alphanumeric charactard and or 0 9 as well as the following special macro values r carriage return x0D n line feed x0A t horizontal tab x09 v vertical tab x0B f form feed x0C 69 TERM Professional b backspace x08 e escape x1
102. anks user interfaces If the user presses the command key but the mainframe host has not yet responded the keyboard will become locked and the only keys available are GyesR tinpil estR eq keys A locked keyboard is indicated by the word SYSTEM appearing in the status bar Connecting to a Remote TN5250 System You may establish a TN 5250 session using the C ontwacimand on the Connentenu or by pressing the C onnediutton on the toolbar Hostname The drop down list box next to the H ostnbwtton identifies the official name alias or IP Address of the host to which you are connecting Typein a hostrattiek on a hostnariethe list box If the name you entered is not vabi connection cannot be made an error message is displayed To add or delete host names from the drop down list box see M odifying a Host Recall List Profile Enter a profile name or select one from the drop down list box If you select the Default profile the factory settings are loaded A If the profile you select has a hostname and or port number associated with it that DIFFERS from the hostname and or port you have entered manually your choices are overridden by those of the profile For more information on Profiles see Profiles Port Enter a port number to be used for the connection The default port number is the standard Telnet port port 23 TN 5250 supports the use of command line conpeqameters For more information see Command Line O ptions Mod
103. api if pfnHllapi NULL Display and return error return Use the function pointer to thadllapi function to call into the EHLLAP32 DLL The following C code demonstrates this process void ExecuteHLLAPIFunc nt FuncNo char Data int Len int RC pfnHllapi FuncNo Data Len RC Enabling HLLAPI in TN3270 Before you can run your HLLAPI program you must first enable HLLAPI in TN3270 The following steps explain how to enable HLLAPI 1 Open the TN3270 application 2 Open the Preferences dialog from the Options menu On the Emulation page check the Enable HLLAPI checkbox 3 Save this profile and exit the application Connecting your HLLAPI Program to a HLLAPI enabled TN3270 Session To connect your HLLAPI Program to a HLLAPI enabled TN3270 session follow these steps 1 2 Before starting your program start the TN3270 application Open the TN3270 profile in which you enabled HLLAPI TN3270 prompts you for an available session letter ID and a session name You must choose the session letter ID and session name if one that your HLLAPI program connects to when it calls the CONNECTPS 1 function Start your program Multiple Sessions CENTURY S HLLAPI does not allow a single HLLAPI application to be connected to more than one session at a time Set Session Parameters The following HLLAPI parameters are not applicable in CENTURY S HLLAPI CONLOG CONPHYS NOCFGSIZE CFGSIZE
104. aracter Set IBM PC Character Set DEC Multinational Character Set The data bits per character or word length setting of a connection plays a partin determining the allowable data which can come across that connection More characters are displayable over an 8 bit connection than a 7 bit connection In fact a 1 bit difference doubles the number of allow able characters The increased number of allowable characters is ideal for displaying graphic characters accents and diacritical marks at the same time This allows the display of multinational characters In addition special symbols such as a pound sign and superscripts can be displayed Serial communication occurs as a serial stream of bits sent from one system to another In order fof the stream to be synchronized at both ends of the link it is divided into frame These frames are mark d by a start bit always 0 and a stopbit always 1 The data is what falls in between In most cases dat is transmitted one byte 8 bits at a time However a 7 bit wordlength is sometimes used for transmitting text only files The DEC VT320 and DEC VT220 emulations support the DEC Multinational Character Set which is composed of the ASCII Character Set and the DEC Supplemental Graphic set In Tablel all characters below hex 80 make up the ASCII Character Set and all characters at and above hex 80 compose the DEC Supplemental Graphic set 105 TinyTERM Emulator Table 1 DEC Multinat
105. ate Desktop Icon becomes Remove Desktop Icon Create Desktop Icon Creates an icon for the printer and places that icon on the Microsoft Windows desktop This menu selection isthesameas Configure On Screen Create desktop icon Remove Desktop Icon Replaces Create Desktop Icon when a desktop printer icon already exists Choose Remove desktop Icon to remove the selected printer icon from the desktop This menu selection is the same as Close selected from the desktop printer icon system menu Delete Printer Removes the printer configuration from LPR and removes any associated icon from the desktop This menu selection isthesameas File Delete Printers Properties Brings the Configure tab to the front The last used Configure tab Misc On Screen or Protocol is selected Make Default Printer Turns the selected printer into the default printer The default printer name appears in LPR s titlebar This menu selection is the same as Configure Misc Set as the default printer Pausing Print Jobs To hold a print job in the local print queue while someone else prints a job or while you replace a print cartridge you can pause the print job To pause a print job 1 Select the printer icon from the Printers Icon Bar 2 Select Status 3 Click Hold To send the job to the printer just click Resume 235 N amp work A pplications Filter Options To print the files correctly sometimes a filter must be specified For example
106. ate the maximum value allowed for the current font selected Please note that selecting this option will uncheck the Scale to a TERM Font option in the Font Setup dialog box as these options are mutually exclusive No Screen Scrolling This selects whether the screen scrolls when a character is typed in the last column of the last line or a linefeed code is received on the last line If unchecked all lines scroll up one line and the cursor appears at the beginning of the last line If checked the cursor moves to the beginning of the first line Ignore Graphics Parity Bit This enables checked and disables unchecked masking of the parity 8th bit for incoming and outgoing data during terminal emulations and data captures This option is ignored in 8 bit emulatormcluding AT386 SCO ANSI WYSE 60 PCTERM and VT 220 VT320 132 Column Mode This controls the number of columns available in the current emulation If checked the current emulation will be switched into 132 column mode By default this is unchecked providing 80 columns TERM Professional Emulator e Type the number of Lines and Columns available for display on the monitor if different than the number of lines and columns displayed as the default 2 To accept the new settings pres amp NTER Or click on the OK Button To reject the new settings pressSC Or click on the Cancel Button Changing Data Capture and Printer Settings 1 SelectConfigure Data Captur
107. ation Parameters Directory The directory that will be used when installing the software will then be displayed Type the desired directory for the software or press RETURN to accept the default directory o century If unsure of the correct directory to be used simply accept the default A Century program group will be setup automatically Components Selectthel ERM Professional komponents to install e Terminal Emulator Provides terminal emulation for a variety of terminals e 10TCP IP Network Applications Provides options to install N etwork Shared Services and N etwork Printing e TCP IP Network Stack The install program will determine the type of operating system running on the PC If Windows 95 is detected this option will not be available as the TCP IP Network Stack used witiERM Professionals the Microsoft TCP IP Network Stack in Windows 95 Options include TCP IP for Local Networks SERIAL Networks as well as the Internet Dialer software After specifying which of the components will be installed clitK XT to continue with the installation By default all the components will be installed Unless you are sure a component should not be installed accept the default 10 TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol network protocol that provides communication across interconnected networks that may use different hardware platformsi Windows to UNIX systems Completing Setup Follow the
108. ation using the names rather than the IP address This validates the name resolution DNS HOSTS Hostname Lookup Failed The DNS Server or Hosts file does not recognize the name entered inthe Host Name or IP Addressfield in the Ping tab Try another host name or enter the host s IP address instead Host not responding The host cannot be reached Check the network configuration by selecting Configure Interface The network card should also be checked by selecting Configure Network Card 142 Setting up the Dialer Setting up the Dialer Getting Started Changing the Dialer Settings Using the Dialer Menus Login Scripts Troubleshooting the Dialer Getting Started The Dialer functions described in this section will only apply to systems running on Windows 3 1 or Windows for Workgroups For those systems using Windows 95 the dialer functions provided with Windows 95 should be used Refer to the Windows 95 documentation for details on running these functions The Century Dialer application provides the ability to e Connect the PC to a remote host by using a modem and a telephone line or by using a direct serial line e Writea script to automate connection and disconnection e View the status of the connection Prior to Setting up the Dialer Before using the Dialer check the following e Besurethat the PC is connected to a modem or to a dedicated serial line e If using an external modem be sure the modem is
109. ave As Used to save an Untitled profile or to save the currently loaded profile with a new name This can be used to make a copy of the currently loaded profile Delete Used to delete particular profile If the currently loaded profile is deleted an Untitled profile is loaded An instance of the application cannot delete a profile which is currently being used by another instance of the application Open and Deletean only be used if there A are one or more profiles available to the application For a complete description of the profile related items O pen Save As and Delete click on any of these items then click on the Help button found in each respective dialog box For a complete list of settings that can be saved as a part of the profile see Profiles Print Select this item if you want to prtilm text on a screen By clicking the Pibutton you can print all of the text you currently see on the screen It is printed with a margin of 5 inches on all sides The font is automatically adjusted to fit the paper orientation you choose portrait or landscape Printing a Selection of Text e Select the block of text you want to psynpressing your left mouse button and holding it down as you drag it across the text e Release the mouse button e Press CTRL C to copy the text to the Windows Clipboard e Open an application in which you can ptiattext For example you could use N otepad e Press CTRL V to paste the text in
110. ble 1 Control Menu Options Restores an icon to an active window or resizes a window to its original size M oves the window to a new location Once selected the cursor becomes a crosshair M ove the cursor until the window is in the desired position and click Enlarges or reduces the window The cursor becomes a crosshair Hold the left mouse button down and move the cursor outside of the window an outline o the window appears M ove the cursor until the window outline is the desired size and release the le mouse button Minimize Reduces the window to an icon Double click on the TERM Professional icon to open and activate the window Maximize Enlarges the window to the size of the screen Closeor ALT F4 Exits TERM Professional Ctrl ESC Opens the Task List dialog box to switch to another running Windows application Th amp LT TAB buttons may be used to cycle through the applications Title Bar The Title Bar displays the title of the TERM Professional window The TERM Professional window may be moved to a different location on the screen by pressing the mouse button once when the pointer is on the TERM Professional tool bar While holding down the mouse button slide the mouse pointer to the desired location on the screen then release the button Minimize Button Clicking on theVinimize Button minimizes the window and is useful for eliminating screen clutter Remote applications are not affected when TERM Professional i
111. cal printer option 3 A list of valid printer types will then be displayed Highlight the correct manuafacturer and the correct model for the printer 4 Highlight the correct Port to use for the printer The port that was added using the LPR function at the beginning of this section will be listed asa valid port This is the port that should be selected 5 If the new printer should be used as the default printer for Windows based programs click onthe Yes option If this printer should not be set as the default click No 6 Thefinal screen provides the option to print a test page for the printer A test page will verify communication with the printer this verifies that the printer has been connected properly and the PC can send information to the printer Windows 3 1 Windows for Workgroups 1 226 Torun LPR double click on the LPR icon For Windows 3 1 and Windows for Workgroups the first time LPR is run the following D efine N etwork Printer dialog displays Printing Files LPR Figure 2 Define Network Printer Dialog Box Define Network Printer Remote machine name pei Cancel Remote printer name pene seer em o o o ooo ooo Remote machine nameis the host name or IP address of the machine that defines the printer for the network Some printers define themselves to the network For these network printers the remote machine name is the IP address of the printer Remote printer nameis the name for t
112. ceed to the network configuration dialog where the network card may be configured If the setup program does not find network drivers running and Windows 3 1 is used a list of network cards that the install has available will be provided The configuration of the network card will follow 2 TheTERM Professionabetup is then complete The Summarize and Finish screen will be displayed showing the information selected for the install The option is given to click on the BACK button to make any desired changes Verify that the installation parameters contain the correct information Click on the CANCEL button if the installation should be ended or click on the FINISH button if the information displayed is correct Selecting the FINISH button starts the installation of the actual components to the hard drive Installing the Software Click Install when satisfied with the installation settingSetupinstalls theTERM Professionalprograms and files prompting diskette changes as needed If one of the following conditions exist setup prompts the restart of Windows after the first disk is installed When Windows is restart amp amp RM Professional installation continues 16QODI OpenDatalink Interface 10 e A previous version of ERM Professionalexists e TERM Professionaleplaced a Windows foiVorkgroups network After installingTERM Professionaj setup lists the files modified during installation and the names of backup files created for each mo
113. certain results appearing on the screen With HLLAPI you can automate this task Century Software s version of HLLAPI is based on the Windows HLLAPI Specification A HLLAPI kit is available on our FTP siteftp ftp censoft com and the README with the kit describes any discrepancies betw eeriV inHLLAPI and Century Software s HLLAPI The name of the kit is HLLAPI ZIP For more detailed information on using HLLAPI see the on line H ep Session Configuration Dialog Available Sessions Each HLLAPI session has a unique session letter associated with it Therefore when you connect to a host with HLLAPI enabled you must choose a session letter for that connection The list box only contains those session letters which have not already been assigned Session Long Name You can fill in this field with a more descriptive name but it is not required The name can be up to 8 characters long OK Click on this button to exit the dialog and save your changes to the dialog Cancel Click this button to ignore your changes Help Click this button to get on line Help Color Tab Click O ptions Preferences C olor taldisplay options used to change the colors displayed by TN 3270 on your screen Available Fields Thislistbox displays the colors that can display on the TN 3270 screen Some of these colors have field names instead of standard color names The field names include Protected Highlighted Fieldshave some type of special attribu
114. cscs nanain ni uniana nannaa aaan na na ianiai inaani aaan xi Support Line Procedures ee ee xi What Century Software Will D sssssssssssussnnnsnnnunannnnnnnnnunannnnannnnannnnannnnanana xii Installing TERM Professional Prior to UN Stal b eccssicsccissccsnstcsddssstsacsassacssscentsacstarsvesecnddsactdeusensdceddisstseehdassdecesestdecssersinne 1 Collecting Installation I Mformati ON 2 Local Area N etwork LAN Information sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 4 Installing TERM Professional sssssssssssnsannnsannnnunnnnannnnnnannnnannnnannnnannnnanannnnannanannnna 5 Specifying Installation ParameterS s sssssssssnsnsunnnnnnnnnnnannnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnanannanannanan nnna 6 nace healing TERM Professional to a neee ork file TOVE aan 1 TERM Professional Emulator Using TERM Professional The TERM Professional WindOW ssssssssssssnsnsnnnunannunannnnunnnnnnnnnnnannnnannnnannnnanannnnan B Using the Help SyStemM ssssssssusususnsunnnnnnnnnnnnununnnunnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanananannnnnnnnnnnnan 21 Changing SettingS sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnununununnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanananananannnnnnnnnnnnananananan anaana 21 File T VANSTOMS vesissccsacssvscsasdscsssessonsacsadzscessnsassesecsasassaddseescasdusaassicennsnssaesenenissacsast eneen 32 Saving the SettiNgS s ssaussssassusrsnssnrusnanaegennnnnnneesnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnen Advanced Configuration TERM Professional
115. ct The BINDINGS statement in the MAR_NDIS section must match the name of the network adapter section The NDIS network adapter driver in CONFIG SYS did not initialize correctly The network adapter is not found by the network adapter device driver The configuration specified for the network adapter in PROTOCOL INI is incorrect A network protocol has determined that the network adapter Media Access Controller driver is not compatible with the network adapter A network driver in CONFIG SYS did not load correctly or PROTMAN could not find PROTOCOL INI The network adapter may not be connected to a network PROTMAN EXE could not load due to insufficient DOS memory 185 N etwork Addresses Network Addresses Overview Address Classes Broadcast Addresses Subnets and Subnet Masks Gateways and Routing Overview This section highlights IP network addresses Detailed specifications are available in Request for Comment RFC documents RFC documents can be obtained via anonymous FTP at NIC DDN MIL Each computer or host on the network has an IP Internet address that uniquely identifies it The IP address may be used in commands to identify and connect to specific hosts individual machines connected to the network Each IP address is one 32 bit value A portion of the address defines the network while another portion defines the host on that network The 32 bit IP address is commonly divided into four 8 bi
116. ct the Map Network Drive option from the file menu Windows 3 1 Workgroups Quick Overview NFS connections and configurations may be made in three different locations The following table summarizes the options available and where these can be found Table 1 Windows 3 1 NFS Option Overview Task or Option Location Remarks Configuring network drives Control Panel Networks Set name password and settings Connecting to a File Manager Disk Read write remote files network drive Network Drive Sharing network files Control Panel Networks Allow users to share files across the network 198 NFS Client Table 2 Windows for Workgroups NFS Option Overview Task or Option Location Remarks Configuring network Control Panel Networks Set name password drivers PC NFS and settings Connecting to a File Manager Disk Read write remote files network drive Connect Network Drive PC NFS Sharing network files Control Panel Networks Allow users to share files PC NFS across the network Accessing NFS The NFS application is installed automatically when Century for a Local Area N etwork LAN interface is installed Look for the N etwork icon in the Windows Control Panel not in the Century program group NFS is not available for serial PPP SLIP or CSLIP interfaces Setting the Authenticator NFS facilities are installed when Microsoft Windows is started N FS cannot link drives however until a PCN FS server
117. cta printer icon in the Printers Icon Bar 2 Select PR s File Print Files 3 Typethe directory and filenamein FileName OR Browse through the files of a directory and highlight the file s to print To select multiple files hold down Ctrl and click the left mouse button 4 Click OK The printer selected from the Printers Icon Bar prints the file Printing from within the LPR Menu To print from within an application for example Microsoft Word to an LPR printer the Microsoft Windows printer must be associated with the LPR print queue The Microsoft Windows printer and the remote printer must be the same type of printer for example if the remote printer is a PostScript printer the Microsoft Windows printer must also be a PostScript To associate the Microsoft Windows printer with the LPR application print queue 1 Selecta printer icon in the LPR window 2 Select Configure Misc 3 In Directory for spooled files type the directory to which the files will be copied before printing OR 231 N amp work A pplications Browse through the directories and select one M ake note of the port specification listed below the Directory for spooled files window Click Control Panel The Control Paned Printers dialog displays Highlight a printer and click Connect Scroll down through the Ports window until the LPR port specification is found it is probably at the bottom of the list Highlight the port specificatio
118. ctivity To display network card activity for the current Century TCP session select View Statistics Network Interface The following provides a detailed description of the information displayed Packets Network communication occurs in the form of packets Packets are bundles of network information This option displays the total number of packets sent and received on the network card The number of packets sent and received on the network card for the period of time defined in File Update Status also displays 139 Century TCP Bytes Packets are composed of information bytes This option displays the total number of bytes sent and received in packets The number of bytes displayed is determined by the period defined in File Update Status Updating the Displayed Statistics Manual Update To update the current statistics displayed for TCP UDP IP or N etwork Interface in the View Statistics tab select File Refresh Statistics To turn off the automatic update feature select File Update Status Never Before either of these option can be used select View Statistics so that the Refresh Statistics screen will be active Automatic Update To set the Century TCP configuration utility to automatically update the statistics for TCP UDP IP or Network Interface select File Update Status The default update period is every one half second Switching Between LAN and Serial Communication Methods Overview 1
119. current directory into the list box Set button Click this button to assign current settings to the selected button number Erase button Click this button to delete this button from the menu bar 73 TERM Professional Emulator To accept the new settings pres amp NTER Or click on theOK Button To reject the new settings pres amp SC Or click on theCancel Button Saving New Settings Changes made during a session are only in effect for the duration of that session unless they have been saved Saving the session configuration will allow all of TERM Professional s settings to be used again These settings will be placed in a TERM Application Document To save a new configuration Select File Save ICONect As TheSavelCO Nect Asdialog box is displayed Figure 30 TERM Professional Save ICONect As Dialog Box File Name Directories OK test tap c tmp Y Cancel lt 3 tmp Settings List Files of Type Drives Config Files TAP gt Sec v Select the appropriate drive and directory Choose the appropriate filename e In filename type the name of the file you want to save TERM Professional will automatically add the TAP extension Or Select the appropriate filename appearing in the listbox To accept the filename and save pressNTER Or click theOK button To change current file settings click on tiettings button The Save Settingsdialog box is displayed 74 TERM Professional Emulator
120. d Ctrl K eypad Ctrl Keypad Ctrl Keypad Ctrl T Ctrl T E A Ctrl J Ctrl J E Backspace Backspace Requires KEYBOARD EXTBIOS or IN T9 under DOS Requires KEYBOARDINT9 under DOS Local Print Sequences Although the actual A T386 Console doesn t support local print TinyTERM s emulation does through the following sequences 111 TinyTERM Emulator DEC VT52 Emulation Description The DEC VT52 emulation is the VT52 subset of the VT 100 terminal emulation All VT52 escape sequences are processed including graphics characters transparent print and numeric keypad support Keyboard Layout Table 2 DEC VT52 Keyboard Layout VT52 IBM PC VT52 Keyboard Keyboard Byte Sequence PF1 PF4 F1 F4 EP ES Keypad 0 K eypad 9 Keypad 0 Keypad 9 0 9 a EB 5 EC amp ED Application Mode Keypad 0 Keypad 9 Keypad 0 Keypad 9 E p E y Keypad Keypad E m Keypad Keypad E l Keypad Keypad E n Keypad Enter Keypad Enter E M Local Print Sequences The DEC VT52 uses the following sequences On EW Off EX 112 Terminal Emulation Reference DEC VT100 Emulation Description The DEC VT100 emulation is a full featured DEC compatible VT 102 VT100 terminal emulation All VT102 escape sequences are processed including graphics characters and transparent print Keyboard Layout Table 3 DEC VT100 Keyboard Layout VT100 IBM PC VT100 Keyboard Keyboard Byte Sequence F
121. d where n is the number of files successfully transferred Last M essage This field displays the last information message from the local or remote system These messages are mostly useful for interactive progress but are also logged and can be used for debugging To abort a transfer Atany time during a transfer you may abort it by pressing Ctrl C To exit from file transfers When a transfer is complete the Last message field displays n files transferred Press ENTER to exit the transfer status screen 75 TinyTERM Emulator File transfer options Whenever files are transferred options may be specified to perform special functions during the file transfer Options are added at the end of the receiving directory s name unless otherwise indicated Table 3 File Transfer Options Function File list Read a list of files from the filename specified to transfer For example if Local Files to Send is filelist txt TinyTERM will not transfer the file filelist txt but will instead interpret its contents as a list of files to be transferred one filename per line Restart This option enables the restartable file transfer option See the section Restarting Interrupted Transfers in this chapter Query Ask for confirmation before each file is sent during multiple file transfers This option is only used with TERMCRC and WTERMCRC In addition this option must accompany the source file specification rather than the dest
122. d Character This is an edit field which defines the line turnaround character for the IBM 310land IBM 315lemulatior It is also the end of page for the IBM 3101 IBM 315land WYSE 50 emulationsT here are four possible characters e DEC VT Terminal ID String This edit field defines the response to report requests from remote TERM Professional Emulator systems The DEC VT series of terminals respoado requests for information such as 33 TERM Professional Emulator what type of terminal video capabilities and printing capabilities Normally TERM responds only with the terminal type but some applications require more This field allows custonniy of the response WRU Inquire Character This is an edit field which defines the WRU request character This is an edit field of 3 digits Enter the ASCII number for the character that is the WRU Inquiry from the host Valid numbers are from 1 to 255 WRU Answerback This edit field allow ghe userto set an answerback string for connection to systems which require it Add Linefeeds This selects whether to add linefeeds to data sent and received Although usually unchecked some remote systems require it Add Carriage Returns This selects whether to add carriage returns to data sent and received Although usually unchecked some remote systems require it Define Emulation Size As This defines the size of the emulation screen If ToolTips are activated the tip for lines and columns will indic
123. d access and those preceded by are denied LPD access Changing the Position of Host Entries To change the position of host entries in the listbox selectthe Properties button from the Windows 95 N etwork dialog then 1 Select a host machine from the H ost Entries listbox 2 Click either Move Up or Move Down The position of a host entry is important because the access list is always scanned from the first entry to the last The first entry to match the hostname sending LPD a request terminates the search Deleting a Host Machine To delete a host machine select the Properties button from the Windows 95 N etwork dialog then 1 Selecta host machine from the Host Entries listbox 2 Click the Remove button Removing a Network Printer To remove a previously defined printer selectthe Properties button from the Windows 95 N etwork dialog then 1 Select the Services tab A list of managed services is displayed 2 Highlight the selected printer then click Connect 3 Select Printer Connections 250 M anaging N etwork Services 4 From the Printer Names listbox select the printer to remove 5 Click Remove The printer name is deleted from the listbox 6 Click OK Configuring TFTP The Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server allows aremote TFTP client to request the storage and or retrieval of files between the client machine and the server PC machine TFTP allows connections without requesting logi
124. d or port you have entered manually your choices will be overridden by those of the profile If you select the Default profile the default values are loaded Connection Type Network Connection If you are using the Internet to connect to a site choose this option Modem Serial If you do not have an Internet connection you need to either dial directly into the system Dial up or to be connected directly to another computer Direct To what should I set my modem parameters Not sure what to enter for your modem parameters Use the defaults If you want to know what each field means keep reading COM Port Select the COM portto which you have connected your modem Baud Rate Select your baud ratefrom the drop down list To increase your performance you can try setting your baud rate up to 4 times the speed of your modem If you have questions see the rate your modem s manual suggests you use A If you aren t sure if you should change any of the settings below leave the default values as they are the ones most commonly used Contact the site to which you are connecting if you have problems connecting using the default settings Parity Specify your parity type here The parity bit follows the 8 data bits and confirms the accuracy of the character which was just sent However some of the places you try to connect to may require a different parity Odd Even In this type of parity the number of 1s sent in the 7 dat
125. d prior to the disconnection Disconnect This item displays instead of Connect when you are connected to a host Click Disconnect to end your connection to the host or to abort a connection you are attempting Options Menu Preferences This item allows you to specify the following options e Emulation e Styles e Colors e Fonts e Profile Settings Remap Keyboard This item allows you to map the keys of the TN5250 keyboard to your PC keys For more information see Keyboard Mapping Emulation Tab Click O ptions P references Emulationtmbisplay TN 5250 terminal emulation options Terminal Emulation IBM 3179 2 Click here to select IBM 5250 emulation 3179 2 The 3179 2 mode has a 24 row by 80 column maximum screen size IBM 3477FC Click here to select IBM 5250 emulation 3477FC The 3477FC mode has a 27 row by 132 column maximum screen size Force Telnet Negotiation This box is checked by default which means TN 5250 performs Telnet negotiation with the host to which you connect Normally Telnet negotiation is only performed on the Telnet port this option allows negotiation to be performed on non Teinet ports as well If you are connected to a 5250 host on a non Telnet port and see garbled characters on the screen be sure this option is enabled Color Tab Click O ptions Preferences C olor tallisplay options used to change the colors displayed by TN 5250 on your screen Available Attributes If you wa
126. de hostname to address matching and FTP uses whatever service is already available on the network Once connection information has been saved for a host FTP stores the information in a file called FTP IN I This means that the next time FTP is run the same connections may be used by simply selecting them from a list File Name Translation When files are transferred FTP must account for the difference between DOS file names and the longer names used in UNIX or VMS systems PC to Host When a DOS file is transferred to a host FTP leaves the file name alone If the target directory on the remote host already contains a file with the same name FTP overwrites the existing file with the file transferred Host to PC When a file is tranferred to the PC from a host that supports long names FTP uses the following method e FTP converts all characters to upper case e FTP checks whether the file name is longer than eight 8 characters If so FTP truncates the name to the first eight characters e If the original file name had sections divided by decimal points FTP uses the first three characters of the final section as the new file name extension If not FTP adds no file name extension Example Original long name app_a_backup e New DOS name APP_A_B If the original name contained any characters that DOS file names don t allow FTP replaces these characters with an underscore _ Example Original long name Lost F o
127. dified file For more information about modified files see the secti6mample NDIS and ODI Configurationsn this manual TERM Professionals now installed Before running e Reboot the PC e Configure the Dialer if serial port modem connections will be used For more information see th Setting up the Dialetn this manual Installing TERM Professional to a network file server Login as Supervisor and run TERM Professional s installation program After the installation is complete users may be set up by runnimsptup exefrom File Manager for Windows 3 1 or Windows fdWorkgroups For Windows 95 isetup execan be run from File M anager if itis installed or from then option in the main Windows 95 menu A separatesubdirectory will be created for each user The user should have all access rights to the directory TERM Professional must be run from the user directory not the main TERM Professional directory When installing to a network file server ttseibdirectory SER is created under the main TERM Professional directory All users must have read and write permission to this directory Any users with insufficient rights will get an error message and be returned to the operating system 11 TERM Professional Emulator The TERM Professional Emulator The TERM Professional Window Using the Help System Changing Settings Transfer Files Saving the Settings The TERM Professional Window When TERM Professional starts up the following i
128. dows Notepad 157 Century TCP This section explains how to create login scripts and gives desriptions for each of the login scripting commands availablein Century TCP It also provides some examples of login scripts using these commands Login scripts are not available for PAP and CHAP authorization models Adding and Changing Scripts 158 Century TCP provides two sample login scripts that may be review ed by selecting the Phonebook File Name A list of script file names will be displayed Simply select the desired file The name will be displayed inthe FileName list box and the first line of the script will be displayed inthe First Line box This allows easy identification of the script selected To add anew script 1 Select Phonebook 2 Click Add at the end of the FileName list box The Adding aN ew Script dialog box is displayed 3 Enter a name for the new login scriptin the New Name box 4 Select a name of an existing script to base the new scriptoninthe Based U pon box 5 Click OK A new script file which is a copy of the based on script is created The filename extension xsc is automatically appended 6 Select File Save Changes to save the new script 7 Change the login script as desired using the new procedure To modify a login script 1 Select Phonebook 2 From the FileName list box select a file name 3 Click Change Notepad displays the selected script Setting up the Dialer 4 Maket
129. dress here to avoid having to type it in when you connect using anonymous as your user name When you use the anonymous account your e mail address is usually your password Disconnect inactive If you enter a value greater than zero FTP monitors client after your connection to the remote host and disconnects your PC remains idle for longer than the value entered here If the value is zero FTP stays connected indefinitely or until the host breaks the connection Text Font amp Color Choose fonts and colors for the drive windows Window Color Choose a color for the FTP window backgrounds Table 7 Preferences Options Common to All Tabs Item Description Save File Lets you save this configuration for later use Use a file name other than FTP INI Later you can regenerate current Preferences settings just by loading this file Load File Load a previously saved configuration file Window Menu The Window menu allows the rearrangement of windows and icons in FTP Details about each menu item can be found in Table 8 206 Century FTP Table 8 Windows Menu Item Description Tile Horizontal Arranges the windows top to bottom so that they do not overlap Tile Vertical Arranges the windows side by side so that they do not overlap Cascade Arranges the windows so they overlap The title bar of each window remains visible Arrange Icons Rearranges icons Show Output Window Opens the FTP Output window if
130. dvanced Color Settings 1 From the Color Setup dialog box click thejvanced button The Advanced Color Setup dialog box appears Figure 19 TERM Professional Advanced Color Setup Dialog Box i J m 2 Colors for 11 permutations of attribute handling schemes are available To assign colors to these attributes 57 TERM Professional Emulator e Click on the down arrow next to the listbox containing the color to be changed A list of valid color choices will be displayed Select the desired color or e Draga color from one of the paint pots into the listbox containing the color to be changed All sixteen colors are valid for a foreground color Only the bottom row of paint pots the dark hues are valid choices fora background color 3 To accept the new settings pres amp NTER Or click on theOK Button To reject the new settings press ESC Or click on theCancel Button Changing Font Settings 58 The font settings determine the attributes of characters displayed on the screen This function provides a convenient way to change the Font Settings 1 SelectConfigure Fonts The Font Setup dialog box will then be displayed Figure 20 TERM Professional Font Setup Dialog Box T Sca to a TEAM Fort 2 The Font Name box lists the Windows fonts available Click on the desired option 3 The Font Size box lists the sizes supported by the font listed in the Font Name box Click on an item to make a selection
131. e Enter the network name of the remote host e HostIP Thehost s internet address If the desired host s IP address is not known either click Lookup or enter a question mark in the IP address field FTP will use the network name services to find the matching address e Description Optional Enter a description that will allow easy selection of this from a list of other host names If an entry has no description FTP will use the hostname entered 3 Click Add New Entry To begin the next host entry select Clear All Fields Then repeat steps 1 through 3 When all desired hosts have been added go on to step 5 5 Tosavethis list as the regular working list click OK This saves the list in the main FTP HST file the file FTP opens every time it runs To save this list to a different name click Save File Enter a file name then click OK 6 Exitthe FTP program then restart If the list was saved to the main FTP HST file the hosts should appear in the drop down list labelled Hostname when Session Configure is selected If the list was saved to a different name follow the steps below to load the file 211 N etwork Applications Using an Existing HOSTS File 1 From the menus select Session Edit Known Hosts 2 Click Load File 3 Open thedirecto ry and highlight the file to use FTP expects the file to use the following format IP_Address Host_Name comment The pound sign must appear before any com
132. e To select files not adjacent to one another click on the first file then hold down the Ctrl key and click on each additional file Select File Delete Click Yes or Yes to All if more than one file is selected Renaming a File 1 2 3 4 Highlight the name of the file to rename Select File Rename Enter the new file name Click Yes Previewing a File FTP provides the option to view the contents of afile on either the PC or the host When a file is selected to preview FTP looks for an application associated with that file If FTP finds no associated application for a file it opens the file using Windows Notepad To associate a file with an application use File M anager for Windows 3 1 or Windows Explorer for Windows 95 For further information on file associations review the information in the Window s help screens To preview afile 1 2 3 4 Select the file to preview Select File Preview Click Yes When finished close the application If attempting to preview a large file a limit may be encountered in Windows Notepad N otepad displays files that are 64K bytes or smaller 203 N etwork A pplications Printing a File FTP prints text files using the PC s default Windows printer This command will not print files from other applications To printa text file 1 2 3 4 5 Check the printer setup From the menus choose File Print Setup This screen is the same s
133. e expansions The default memory allocated for filename expansions is 3584 13 x 275 bytes sufficient for 275 filenames one byte per character in the filename TERM s filename expansion routine uses only the number of bytes in the filename plus one for memory storage This field can be used either to specify a smaller amount of memory if memory conservation is importantr to specify a larger memory allocation so that more filenames may be selected by the wildcard TERM Professional Emulator Length of Time Before H andshake Timeout This edit field specifies the number of seconds TERM should wait at the beginning of a transfer before timing out due to a lack of respor khen set to zero TERM will never time out Length of Time Before Sender Timeout This edit field specifies the number of seconds for packet sender timeout When set to zero TERM will never time out Length of Time Before Receiver Timeout This edit field specifies the number of seconds for packet receiver timeout When set to zerg TERM will never time out Zmodem WTERM CRC Packet Size This edit field allows you to override the Zmodem and WTERM CRC packet sizes The packet size is in bytes A zero entry sets this field to the default Zmodem WTERM CRC Window Size Thiseditfield allowsyou to adjust the Zmodem and WTERM CRC maximum sliding window size This is preset by the baud rate but you can override it It is used to change the window size so that the time required to
134. e modems Modem Settings group change e Max Baud The maximum baud rate bps supported by the modem e Flow Control The optimum flow control method used by the modem If unsure use XON XOFF Choices are NONE No flow control will be used XON XOFF Software flow control utilizing XON S and XOFF Q characters will be used HARDWARE Hardware flow control between the modems and serial ports will be used ETX ACK Software flow control utilizing ETX C and ACK F characters will be used TERM Professional Emulator Char Send Delay The number of milliseconds between character sends for slower modems Auto Baud Connect Check if your modem requires auto baud rate detection Drop DTR to Hang up Check if your modem supports hang up using DTR signal Dialer Settings Detect Redial Attempts The number of times TERM should redial when a call does not go through e g when the remote system does not answer Redial Pause The number of seconds to pause between redial attempts No Answer Timeout The number of seconds TERM should wait for a carrier signal before it hangs up and redials Any number may be entered in this field butitis recommended that you do not set this value to less than 30 seconds in order to allow time for TERM to dial and for the modems to negotiate a connection Leave DTR on at Exit If checked the modem connection will remain active when you exit TERM To assist in setting up the modem
135. e DOS Requester FIRST NETWORK DRIVE F C WINDOWS PROTOCOL INI net cfg PATH C path NET CFG Link Driver ODI_DRV data Frame Ethernet_SNAP data Frame Ethernet_802 2 data Frame Ethernet_Il data Frame Ethernet_802 3 NWLINK BINDINGS ODI_DRV ExampleN DIS and ODI Configurations 183 Century TCP NETBEUI BINDINGS ODI_ DRV LANABASE 1 SESSIONS 10 NCBS 12 Link Support NewMaxBoards Max Boards 4 Token Rings and Source Routing If source routing is necessary over ODI refer to the N etW are documentation for information about the ROUTE command Since TCP IP uses a different Frame type than NetWare ROUTE must be loaded twice once for each Frame type The ROUTE command is appended to the AUTOEXEC BAT file ODI entries C path ROUTE BOARD 1 C path ROUTE BOARD 2 184 Netbind Error Codes Error Code Listing The following table lists error codes that may be returned by theN DISNETBIND COM module Error Codes Messages secu No error Not supported Already started Incomplete binding Driver not initialized Hardware not found Configuration failure Incompatible MAC No binding Network may not be connected Insufficient memory network driver received an unsupported function request It may be necessary to find an updated NDIS driver for the network adapter Examine CONFIG SYS for duplicate PROTMAN device statements One of the BINDINGS statements in PROTOCOL INI is incorre
136. e Printer or click on thePrinter Setup button on the Ribbon Bar TheData Capture and Printer Setugialog box is displayed Figure 8 TERM Professional Data Capture and Printer Setup Dialog Box Data Capture and Printer Setup x Capture File or Device Name EFAN Capture Device DISK Capture Mode ASCII Capture File Creation Append C Overwrite I Flush Capture Buffer Printer File or Device Name fipet Printer Device DEVICE Printer File Creation Append C Overwrite I Flush Printer Buffer 2 Inthe Capture group the following optiomsay be changed e CaptureFile or Device Name This edit field specifies where data captured goes while data capture is turned on Valid device names include LPE LPT 2 and COM 1 through COM 4 If a filenames specified with anumber sign TERM substitutes a two digit number from 00 to 99 to ensure that each data capture file has a unique name The numbers are incremented each time the capture fie opened i e at the start of a TERM session not each time capture toggledon and off They start oveafterreaching 99 or when a new filenameis assignedthat includes a number sign 35 36 TERM Professional Emulator The capture file is placed in the current directory unless a full pathname is specified The default filename is capt fil CaptureD evice Click on the down arrow to display options This pop up field defines whether the File or D evice N ame field
137. e TAP file Items include author date subject version e mail and description To accept the settings pres amp NTER Or click theOK button To reject the settings pres amp SC Or click theCancel button 75 TERM Professional Emulator To exit without saving pres amp SC Or click theCancel button To save a defined configuration 1 SelectFile Save ICONect or click theSave button on the default Ribbon Bar The current configuration file will be saved with current settings To exit TERM Professional 1 SelectFile Exit or click on theExit Button on the default Ribbon Bar e If changes have been made to the configuration tSave Settings on Exit dialog box will be displayed PressY or click on theYes Button to save current settings The system configuration file will be updated Pre s or click on theNo button to discard any changes Press or click theCancel button to return to TERM Professional e If changes have not been made to the configuration teit dialog box will be displayed PressY or click on theYes Button to quit to the Windows or press or click on theNo Button to return to TERM Professional 76 TERM Professional Advanced Configuration n This Section TERM Professional System Files TERM Professional for Windows startup outline TERM Professional shutdown outline Keyboard Remapping Quoted strings TERM Professional Environment Variables TERM Professional System Files TERM Profe
138. e all characters from any field you have modified Erase EOF Click this button to erase all characters from your cursor location to the end of the field Field Exit Click this button to null the fidd from your cursor location to the end of the field 16 Field Click this button to null the field from your cursor location to the end of the field and move to the next field This button acts the same as the Field Exit button most of the time Field Click this button to null the field from your cursor location to the end of the field and move to the next field If the field is numeric the number is then negated You may not see the negative sign or the last digit of the number on your screen but the computer will utilize the correct negative number EnterRec Adv When you have finished filling in all of the fields and you are ready to send the information back to the server you can click this button to send it Until you click this button the server is receiving the keys you hit such as the Attn or Help keys but is not receiving all of the field information Cursor Select If you havea light pen field in which you need to select you can use this button A light pen field always contains aas the first character Clicking on the Cursor Select button once charijts the a gt indicating that you have selected the field Clicking the Cursor Select button one more time changes the character back ti a Attn Clicking this button sends
139. e cursor changes to the drop state O The status bar also indicates whether a drop is permissible or not For more information s nmapping an existing mapping Erasing an Existing Mapping You can delete the current mapping of any PC key A PC key which does not have any mapping cannot be unmapped The steps tainmap the current mapping of a PC key areas follows e Select the modifier state of the PC keyboard as required by simply clicking on the modifiers e g if you want tanmap the PC key lt Shift gt lt F1 gt of your PC keyboard then click on the lt Shift gt key on the PC keyboard e Click with the left mouse button on the desired PC key drag it over the trash bin and drop it in The cursor changes states to indicate whether a drop is possible or not You can t drop as long as the cursor is in a no drop state O You can drop a Protocol key over a PC key only w hen the cursor changes to the drop state The status bar also indicates whether a droprid qs ble or not Font Tab Selecting the Font tair clicking the Font button on the too LF allows you to select the current font for your TN5250 session Note that fixed width True Type fonts are currently supported by TN5250 Font This list box is used to select the current font The recommended font for use with this product is Courier New If you have problems with characters appearing properly try changing the font 13 Font Style This list box is
140. e dials according to the setting of the Dialer retry count Enter the desired waiting time in seconds The default is 45 seconds Zero 0 means never disconnect Dialer retry count Specifies the number of times the Dialer re dials a number that is not responding Enter the desired number of retries The default is 10 tries Settings on the Phone book Tab The Phone book tab allows the selection specification or modification of a destination for the connection the setting of the phone number for the connection setting a dialing prefix and suffix as well as selecting creating or modifying alogin script In effect this works like a Phone Book where frequently called numbers can be entered and the connection to the number can be automated Each of these options is described in detail Destination The description to associate with a given phone number For example the location the phone number reaches Select an existing destination from the list or click Add to create a new destination 153 Century TCP 154 Number The phone number including area code Select an existing number to be used for the connection or type anew phone number for the connection Numbers must conform to the characters and formats supported by the modem Dialing Prefix Information to be added to the beginning of the phone number Enter any prefix characters required for the telephone system used Dialing Suffix Information to be appended to th
141. e drives restored when Windows is started than to map them each time Windows is started To restore the NFS network drives each time Windows starts 1 Select Control Panel Network or Control Panel Network PC NFS on a Windows for Workgroups network The Century NFS Network Configuration dialog displays 2 Select Drives 3 Select Restore at Startup 4 Click OK Setting Up Read and Write Caching To improve data throughput the data blocks for data written or read via Century NFS can be held in a cache also called a buffer NFS determines the size of the cache To select default values for read and write caching 1 Select Control Panel Network or Control Panel Network PC NFSon a Windows for Workgroups network The Century NFS Network Configuration dialog displays 2 Select Drives 3 Select Read Caching and Write Caching 4 Click OK 202 NFS Client Setting Up Read and Write Size The Read Size and Write Size options set the size in bytes for each NFS read or write data transfer The default read write size is 1024 bytes The maximum size is 8192 bytes To improve performance increase the Write Size to the maximum If a performance decrease due to lost or dropped packets is experienced decrease the Write Size If using a PC network card that can handle 8192 byte packets set the Read Size to the maximum value If a performance decrease due to lost or dropped packets is experienced decrease the Read Si
142. e end of lines of text Clicking this option converts CR LF to the format used by the IBM mainframe when you are sending files Append to File When you click this option the file being transferred is appended to the file identified under Select File Send Click this button to send a file to the IBM mainframe Receive Click this button to receive a file from the IBM mainframe Done Click this button to exit File Transfer Send Options Tab Click File Transfer Then click the Send O ption tab to set up options for transferring files from your PC toan IBM mainframe Keep in mind that you must first be connected to a remote host before you can transfer files Remote File Format The following options define the file format on the IBM mainframe Default Use the default options Fixed This refers to the Fixed RECFM F option in IND FILE Variable This refers to the Variable RECFM V option in IND FILE Record Size This refers to the Fixed REDFM F option in IND FILE TSO Media Options The TSO media options are only available if you have checked TSO under Host System in the Host Options tab Default Use the default options Tracks This refers to the TRACKS option in IND FILE Cylinders This refers to the CYLINDERS option in IND FILE Blocks This refers to the AVBLOCKS option in IND FILE Maximum Block Size This refers to the maximum block size identified in the BLKSIZE n statement Minimum Space Size This refers
143. e entered This information will be used to route the mail to the correct person as well as showing the return address Restarting Interrupted Transfers File transfers will not be restarted if a user aborts the transfer by pressing Ctrl C even if Restart is set This allows interactive aborting of file transfers at the user s will Manual file restarting 82 File transfers may be manually restarted at a later time after interruption this is useful in a situation where the remote location s power has gone down and automatic restarts have not succeeded The manual restart option allows a user to start a file transfer by setting the restart point of transfer to the number of bytes that are found in the destination file M anual restarts work regardless of the setting of the Restart field The manual restart option is indicated by attaching r to both the source file and the destination file in the transfer statement TinyTERM will then check the remote file s size before starting the transfer The transfer will start by seeking to this size on the source file before starting the transfer and appending to the remote file The r option is used on the both the source file and the destination file Using it on a destination file or directory alone has no effect The manual restart facility works only during file transfers that do not require automatic text conversion Thus the r option may not work if the file was transferred with
144. e followed Symbolic links are similar to pointers or associating files If a symbolic link is established between two files accessing one of the files provides the system with the location or address of the second file File Locking prevents more than one user accessing a specific file at the same time This will prevent two users storing changes made to a file where the changes made are stored for only one of the users M akes files and directories visible that begin with a period For example login Configuring the Network Drives After installing Century NFS the NFS Host can be mapped as a drive on the local PC or can have a deviceless connection To map the NFS drive perform the following steps 1 Select theNetwork Neighborhoodicon The display for the network will depend on the setup of the individual PC 2 From thelist of network components select titmtire Network then Century NTNFS Client component Select the desired host from the list of available hosts The available hosts displayed are those hosts that have been entered in the Server M anagementlescribed in item 5 of the Installing Setting the Authenticator Double click on a host to see the list of exported directories To map the exported directory to a network drive right click on an exported directory and select M ap Network Drive Double click on the exported directory for a deviceless connection 2Memory caching allows the smooth flow of data w
145. e modifier state of the PC Keyboard as required by simply checking the modifier check boxes Also select the PC key to which the Protocol key is to be mapped For example if you want to map a Protocol key to lt Shift gt lt F1 gt on your PC keyboard then check only the Shift check box and select the F1 key from the PC keyboard List Box Profile U pdate O ptions 2 Click Push Button 1 to map the selected Protocol key to the selected PC key The PC keyboard List Box is updated to reflect the new mapping Erase Button The steps tainmap an existing mapping are as follows 1 Select the PC key which is to be unmapped 2 Click on the Erase button The PC keyboard List Box is updated to reflect the new state of the modifiers Mapping a Protocol Key to a PC Key Any protocol key can be mapped to any PC key The steps for mappi rgprotocol key to a PC key areas follows e Select the modifier state of the PC keyboard as required by simply clicking on the modifiers For example if you want to map the Protocol key to lt Shift gt lt F1 gt of you PC keyboard then click on the lt Shift gt key on the PC keyboard e Click with the left mouse button on the desired Protocol key drag it over the PC key to which you want to map the Protocol key and drop it The cursor changes states to indicate whether a drop is possible or not You can t drop as long as the cursor is in a no drop state O You can drop a Protocol key over a PC key only
146. e phone number Enter any suffix characters required for the telephone system used Login Script Use of alogin script allows the automation of the login procedure Login scripts may be added or changed as necessary For details on the maintenance of these scripts refer to the section Login Scripts on page 157 File Name List of currently available login scripts Select the desired login script To login manually select Manual Connect When M anual Connect is used click Continue after logging in to the host This action informs the Dialer that the login is completed and that the PPP SLIP CSLIP serial connection process is to continue First Line This item shows the first line of the currently selected login script If Manual Connect is selected nothing displays Setting up the Dialer Add Button Click to display the Adding a Script dialog where a new script may be created Change Button Click to have N otepad open the currently selected login script for editing Settings on the Statistics Tab The Statistics tab allows the viewing of the history and connection summaries of the Dialer session Connection History The Connection History tracks the connections made Click This Connection to change the information in the window to pertain only to the current connection The Connection history allows the display of when the connection was made the tracking of errors displaying the history of all connections as well as the
147. e previous character Ctrl W erases the previous word Ctrl U erase the entire line Note that the screen display of the line may not be accurate if you attempt to erase while screen echo is disabled Line Wrap When Line Wrap is enabled in TTY mode characters after the 80th will be displayed on the next line When disabled a new line does not appear until after the 132nd character In TTY mode Line Wrap may be selected by applications running on the remote host so the status of this item may change without direct user action Force Telnet Negotiation This box is checked by default which means TN 3270 performs Telnet negotiation with the host to which you connect Enabling this allows you to connect to a 3270 host which is not on the Telnet port Normally Telnet negotiation is only performed on the Telnet port this option allows negotiation to be performed on non Telnet ports as well If you are connected to a 3270 host ona non Tel net port and see garbled characters on the screen you should enable this option Enable HLLAPI Check this box to enable HLLAPI In general terms HLLAPI is a collection of functions which can be used within a Visual Basic C or C application to indirectly access the TN 3270 input and output Specifically HLLAPI is a tool which can be used to automate certain repetitive tasks when dealing with the TN 3270 emulator For example you normally log into a host manually type in a command run data and get
148. eCOM Port tab allows the specification of the COM Port the modem speed baud rate flow control data bits stop bits parity auto disconnect timeout dialing timeout and the Dialer retry count The items included in the COM Port Tab basically control how the communication will happen This inclides how quickly the communication or conversation will occur and the basic rules of the conversation If a System Administrator is not available it may be necessary to refer to the documentation for the computers and other devices used for the conversation to determine details on these items Each of these options is described below e Port The COM ports in the computer are where the cables and internal devices such as modems are connected so that the computer can communicate with the outside world M ost personal computers have betw een two and four COM ports Select the COM port used for this connection COM 1 COM2 COM3orCOM4 e Modem Speed Indicates the rate at which the computer exchanges data Typical modem speed settings include 2400 9600 and 19200 The modem documentation describes the maximum speed also called baud rate at which the modem can operate Select the appropriate speed from the list The default is 19200 If the modem s speed is not given on the list select the next fastest speed then set the Flow Control to RTS CTS e Flow Control Indicates how to coordinate sending and receiving data between the PC and the hos
149. ection This is the connection that will be used when Auto Dialing is enabled on the Options menu and a Century TCP application is invoked Select this setting when the name of the desired connection is displayed in the Connection box of the Dialer window Only one network connection may be selected as the default at a time e Authorization This item specifies the 3authenticationmodel for logging into the remote host Select the model appropriate for the host system If the settings are not known contact the System Administrator or Internet provider Click to display the Authorization Settings dialog where one of the following may be selected Use PAP Authorization M odel This protocol sends an identifying name and an associated password Login scripts are disabled when this is selected This setting is unavailable if SLIP CSLIP or Serial connection type are selected Use CHAP Authorization M odel Login scripts are disabled when this is selected This setting is unavailable if SLIP CSLIP or Serial connection types are selected Use Standard Login This is the default setting and requires no special authorization Login scripts may be used or manual interaction may be used to log in 3 When connecting to aserver or when a computer is acting as a server the computer will verify that the connecting machine has the right to connect and access it 4 This type of login is the most common Usually when a connection is made the user must
150. ed 6 To accept and save the new settings pregsNTER Or click on theSave button To reject the new settings pressSC Or click on theCancel button Changing Server Settings Select Configure Server The Server Setupdialog boxis displayed 67 TERM Professional Emulator Figure 26 TERM Professional Server Setup Dialog Box Hostmode Server IX Require Login IX Allow File Transfers Cancel X Allow New Users IX Enable Sysop Chat Edit Opening Banner File banner txt Message of the Day File motd txt Asynce Network I Set Modem to Auto Answer Port Number 23 FIP X Auto Baud Rate Detect C WTemCRC Server C Zmodem Server I Activate on Startup IX Allow Anonymous Starting Directory C WTERM Options available include H ostmode Server Selecting this button enables TERM Professional to function as a host machine similar in many ways to a BBS Options which affect hostmode are Require Login This checkbox determines if a login requirement exists If checked a username M UST be provided in order to login If unchecked connection does not require any sort of login Allow New Users This checkbox determines whether unrecognized login names are accepted or rejected If checked any login name entered that does not exist in the hostmode user list will be added as a new user If unchecked only the names within the hostmode user list will be valid login names Allow
151. ed To print a banner page select Configure Misc and select Print a banner for each job Deleting a Printer To delete a printer 1 Select the printer to be deleted fromthe Printers Icon Bar 2 From the File menu select Delete Printer A shortcut method is 1 Move thecursor over the printer icon and press the right mouse button The Quick Menu displays 2 Select Delete Printer Printing LPR offers four easy ways to print files the File M anager may be used to print files to the default print or a specific printer may be selected the LPR File menu may be used or files may be printed via a Windows application Printing a File from File Manager default printer Open up Microsoft File M anager and select the file you want to print Drag and drop the file from File M anager onto the LPR window The default printer prints the file specified printer Select the file to be printed and drag and drop the file onto an LPR printer icon The Printers Icon Bar a desktop printer icon or the 230 Printing Files LPR minimized LPR window icon may be used For information on creating a desktop icon see Creating a Desktop Icon for a Printer on page 5 5 If a printer from the Printers Icon Bar is used that printer prints the file If the minimized LPR window is used the default printer prints the file If a desktop printer icon is used that printer prints the file Printing a File From LPR s File Print Files 1 Sele
152. ed thd AN information may be skipped N etwork Interface Card If a Network Interface Card will be used complete the LAN Information on the next page Both If both a serial interface and a network interface will be used complete the LAN Worksheet on the next page 6 A serial or modem connection is one where the PC or modem is connected to a multi user system 7LAN Local Area Network the PC communicates with the main network computer server through a network interface card NIC installed on the PC Local Area Network LAN Worksheet The following information will be required to complete the setup of TERM Professional TERM Professional Enter the information specific to the computer on the blanks provided It may be necessary to consult with the System Administrator for this information Examples are shown in parentheses For Network Connections PC Internet Address 156 27 1 51 PC Name pc_10 The Internet Address should be available from the System Administrator or from the Internet Provider For PC s that Communicate via N etwork Interface Cards NIC NIC Vendor Name 3COM NIC Type 3C 503 8 nterrupt Level 5 91 0 Base Address 0x300 This information should be available in the network interface card documentation if there is not a Syste Administrator 8 In order for the computer to receive one task at a time from the different devices PC s printers modemstc
153. ed must be a command recognized by a modem This command accommodates the modem requirement for pauses between characters in commands sent to it For faster communications to devices other than modems use the transmitcommand Even though the PC is communicating with a host through a modem once the connection is established the transmit command may then be used for sending commands to the host itself Makes the PC wait the specified number of seconds before executing the next command Some actions require a pause For example if sending commands that take the host several seconds to execute use the pause command to make the PC wait for the host to catch up Displays a dialog box with the specified string as a prompt then transmits the input the user enters at the prompt in the format specified by flag If flag 0 or non existent the password characters are displayed as asterisks If flag 1 the text is displayed in readable format If no flagis specified flag 1 is assumed Interprets an IP address for SLIP connections The int7 value determines the type of IP address being interpreted If int 1 the IP address is ignored If int 1 the IP address if valid is assigned as the local host s IP address If int 2 the IP address if valid is assigned as the remote host s IP address Setting up the Dialer Table 1 Command Listing continued Int2 specifies a time in seconds in which the IP address must be inte
154. ed to the printer name s selected To associate to a local printer select the desired printer from the list of possible local printers and choose OK The printer selected now displays in brackets next to the printer name in the Printer N ames listbox 246 6 M anaging N etwork Services It may become necessary to redirect print requests to another printer if the local printer is down To associate the local printer to a remote network printer select the Redirect to remote printer box Enter anetwork printer pathname in the Printer Path box using the NFS network printer path with a format of machine name printer name Century NFS may be used to browse and find printer names on remote machines Click OK to accept the changes Specifying Printer Options LPD allows control of the print queue page orientation and font used for print documents To change printer options Select the Properties button from the Windows 95 N etwork dialog then OF ge OSS Select the Services tab A list of managed services is displayed Highlight the desired printer then select the Configure button Select Printer Connections Select the printer name s from the Printer N ame listbox Click Setup If more than one printer name is selected changes are applied to all selections H owever only the first name selected displays in the Network Printer Options dialog box M ake changes to any of the following 247 N etwork A pplications P
155. edures To assist the Technical Support staff in answering questions and resolving problems quickly please follow these support line procedures L Be prepared to provide specific details concerning the computer system s hardware and software configuration In addition t amp erial Number and Version Number of TERM Professional should be noted prior to contacting Technical Support Because Century Software s products run on a wide variety of systems this information is important to the Technical Support representatives to provide correct answers quickly Call from a phone which allows access to the computer system while speaking with a Technical Support Representative Have any applicable documentation readily available Read and note any applicable sections or release notes If possible be prepared to re create the problem with the Technical Support Representative Otherwise be prepared to give a step by step description of how the problem occurred Do not request a specific representative for new questions or problems this may cause delays in responding to calls TERM Professional What Century Software will do xvi A Technical Support Representative will discuss any questions or problems which are usually resolved during the initial contact If a representative is not available on the initial call one will respond to the call in the order it was received If the caller is unavailable on a call back the representative will
156. eerrersrersrrireriersrrreserese 87 za a Phe RS 232 Standard senora A EE EEEE 90 Network Connections BAPI Bridge Application Prograft Interface c cecceeccsseesesssenessseseessesesseeseesses 100 BIOS Interrupt 14h INT 14h Interfaces ecceeccececeeeneeeeeeseeeeceeeesneeneeeceeseaees 100 NetBIOS and MSNET Interfaces cccc cece ccc ecsseceeeeeeeeeseeeceeecceceecseeesnseseeeaenasees 101 Virtual Circuits Conf urations sssrini orisi oE EENE 101 Novell Netware for UNIX or SCO IPX SPX 0 o oo cecsesccceccseeeeeeceeeeeseseeeeaessseeees 104 Windows SOCKECUS wisi cicncevscccsniecsates vaasledieacs EEEE A E AE edaetes deadecsaiasaiviondoamanpenteds 105 Character DUS vce E Pee piel foto oe eee E mem emcas i Termi nal E mu lati on R CFELEN CO ceccescceccnecensensseneeend11 PN3270 Terminal Emulation o o T M nnn HELAPI Setup eicresceronoinite reitor isini a nope EEEE EVENEENS ETEEN EEE Profile Setup 2 22s shacsasudase saeadend gaccanesceasa saaeney angaass seed saa ETE E EEES TN5250 Terminal Emulation 0 cc ccc ccc ccc cen cen cen EEEE NCS EN KENEN SENSEN EN Century TCP pen ee THEE GTAP ELS 2 6 ccce cacce a aa beceasaratadtessanm ndeaigatenaiatslieengeeinsteeseetisas 131 Switching Between LAN and Serial Connections ecceeeececeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 142 eee Troubleshooting Network Connections EEEE EEEE EENAA ATAT EE 143 Setting up the Dialer Getting Started eiennenn e
157. elete a hostname from the host recall list in the drop down list box in the Connect dialog You can get to this dialog be clicking the Hostname button on the Connect dialog or by clicking File Delete on the menu bar 1 After the Edit Host Recall List dialog appears click on a hostnamein the Host Recall List field Click the Delete button Repeat step 2 until you have finished deleting hostnames Click the Done button To see that the hostnameere deleted click on the down arrow by the Hostname list box in the Connect dialog Using Command Line Connect Options Command line parameters may be specified using the File Run or File Properties command of Program Manager The Run command is used to run the application once The Properties command should be used when you will frequently need to run the application with the same default parameters On the TN5250 command line you can specify the hostname port and profile These three command line parameters may be used together or in any combination however hostname and port number take precedence over the profile name If any or all of these parameters are specified on the command line along with a profile name the values specified in these parameters override the corresponding values specified in the profile Hostname must be preceded by h The hostname must bea valid hostname or IP address on the network If a valid hostname is specified on the command line connection occurs immediate
158. emap Keyboard i Fl Font Selection P references Font afl Fit Font to Window Preferences Font 7 Screen Print print screen aml Exit TN3270 File Exit Status Display The TN 3270 status bar displays the full name of the remote host currently selected options and the position of the cursor on the screen File Menu The File M enucontains two sections one allowing you to manipulate profiles and another allowing you to exithe application New Used to load an Untitled profile having default factory settings Open Used to load a previously created profile Save Used to save the currently loaded profile If the currently loaded profileis Untitled then a name must first be assigned to the profile using the Save functions as a Save As see below Save As Used to savean Untitled profile or to save the currently loaded profile with a new name This can be used to make a copy of the currently loaded profile Delete Used to delete a particular profile If the currently loaded profile is deleted an Untitled profile is loaded An instance of the application cannot delete a profile which is currently being used by another instance of the application A Qpen and Delete can only be used if there are one or more profiles available to the application For a complete description of the profile related items O pen Save As and Delete click on any of these items then click on the Help button fo
159. en you disconnect from the remote host For more information see Exit on Disconnect Emulation Tab Click O ptions Preferences Emulationtmbisplay TN 3270 terminal emulation options Terminal Emulation IBM 3278 2 Click here to select IBM 3270 emulation 3278 2 The 3278 2 mode has a 24 row by 80 column maximum screen size IBM 3278 3 Click here to select IBM 3270 emulation 3278 3 The 3278 3 mode has a 32 row by 80 column maximum screen size IBM 3278 4 Click here to select IBM 3270 emulation 3278 4 The 3278 4 mode has a 43 row by 80 column maximum screen size IBM 3278 5 Click here to select IB M 3270 emulation 3278 5 The 3278 5 mode has a 27 row by 132 column maximum screen size TTY Click hereto select TTY emulation If you change to TTY mode from an IBM 3278 x mode the screen size will remain at the default size used in that mode For example if you select TTY mode from IBM 3278 5 mode the screen size remains at 27 lines and 132 columns All connections are initially madein TTY mode If the selected emulation mode is other than TTY eg IBM 3278 2 the application switches to the selected mode if the host is capable of doing so TTY Parameters Swap BS lt gt DEL In TTY mode this item toggles the backspace del ete code sent to the remote host Certain hosts recognize backspace as the rubout key while others require the DEL character If you attempt to backspace to correct a typing
160. er files For this reason most communications programs support one or more error correcting file transfer 1protocols In addition to two proprietary protocols TERM communicates with systems running the popular Xmodem XmodemCRC Ymodem Zmodem or KERMIT protocols TinyTERM also supports data capture and line by line sends of text files to allow file transfer to or from systems with limited communications capabilities Protocols define standardized methods for error checking formatting of data packets etc 69 TinyTERM Emulator Error checking protocols 70 When communicating over phone lines there is always the possibility that a poor connection will cause data to be lost or corrupted Even with a direct serial link there is the possibility of data loss especially if the receiving system is very busy or if the link is improperly cabled As a result it is best to use one of TinyTERM s error checking protocols if the remote system has a communications program This will ensure error free data transfer Files transferred with error checking protocols go through a series of tests as they are being transferred Each time the sending system sends out a packet of data it does a mathematical calculation called a cyclical redundancy check or CRC on the packet and sends the result The receiving system then does the same calculation on each packet If a result doesn t match the packet is marked bad and is sent again If a given
161. er to establish a connection between the PC and the remote host the configuration parameters will need to be specified for the PC to host connection The easiest way to specify these parameters is to first fill out the dialogs presented by the Initial Setup Assistant and then to fill out the dialogs presented by the N ew Connection Assistant The assistants automate the tabs in the M ain Dialer window Using the Initial Setup Assistant The Initial Setup Assistant goes through the process of setting up the dialer in a step by step manner Setting up the Dialer includes defining the 2COM port settings modem settings and dialing parameters The Initial Setup Assistant will be displayed the first time the Dialer is accessed To use this function at any time select Tools Initial Setup Assistant from the main Dialer window The Specify Parameters N ow or Later dialog will be displayed To set up the Dialer parameters click on the Specify Parameters Now option If the Specify Parameters Later option is selected the Initial Setup Assistant dialog will be closed Using the New Connection Assistant The N ew Connection Assistant provides step by step assistance to define a connection to the Dialer Defining a connection includes defining the connection type defining the appropriate network settings defining all host to PC addresses defining the host s phone number and defining the login type and parameters 2COM isan abbreviation for Commun
162. erfter99 or when a new filenam s assigned that includes a number sign The print file is placed in the current directory unless a full pathnaise specified The default filename is pr fil PrinterD evice Click on the down arrow to display options This pop up field defines whether the File or D evice Name field is aD EVICE such as a printer a TERM Professional Emulator DISK file oraSPOOL utility or PrintM gr the Windows Print M anager If CAPTURE is selected all print requests will be routed through the data capture system If NONE is selected all print requests will be ignored 37 TERM Professional Emulator e Printer File Creation This group of 2 radio buttons determines how an existing print file should be treated If APPEND is selected print data is appended to the end of the existing file If OVERWRITE is selected the existing file is overwritten with new print data This field does not affect data which is sent to a device or spooler e Flush Printer Buffer This checkbox controls if TERM Professional flushes out the printer buffer immediately upon receiving a print off request This ensures that all print data is written to the file or printed If checked the printer buffer will be flushed 4 To accept the new settings pres amp NTER Or click on the OK Button To reject the new settings pressSC Or click on the Cancel Button File Transfers Transfer Files 1 SelectFile File Transfer or click on theT
163. ertain limit TinyTERM issues a request for a receive ACK and waits for the ACK During sending if bad CRCs are encountered more than four times consecutively TinyTERM halves the packet size adjusts the window size to ten times the new packet size and starts sending again This process repeats until the fileis transferred TinyTERM s sliding window protocols TinyTERM s WTERMCRC and Zmodem provide manual and automatic control of the following protocol parameters Table 4 Sliding Window Protocol Parameters Parameter Protocol Setup Field packet length WTERMCRC Zmodem Packet Size window size WTERMCRC Zmodem Window Size send timeout Length of Time Before Sender Timeout receive timeout Length of Time Before Rec eiver Timeout handshake timeout Length of Time Before H andshake Timeout maximum bad packets Maximum Consecutive Bad Packets Items listed without WTERM CRC also have effect on other transfer protocols Normally the default settings for packet and window size will suffice On extremely noisy lines or lines with long delay this feature allows the user to best optimize data throughput Effects of satellite or other delay can be compensated for by increasing the transmit window size and increasing the send and receive timeouts Effects of extremely noisy lines can be compensated for by decreasing the packet size If the window sizeis set WTERM CRC and Zmodem will act like non sliding window protocols Initial settings
164. es Each of the options is described in detail in the following pages Sorting the File List FTP allows the sorting of files in several ways as shown in Table 1 200 Century FTP Table 1 FTP Sort File Options To Sort by Choose This Button Or This Command Name A to Z Session View Sort Order Name File Type file extentions Session View Sort Order Extension Size smallest to largest Session View Sort Order Size Date on which the file was created or last modified oldest to newest Session View Sort Order Date Reversed order for any of the above Session View Sort Order Reverse Showing File Details FTP provides the option of which file details to display e Select the Short List button to show file names only e Select the Long List button to expand the display to include those items selected under Session View Sort Detail Showing Directory Contents Double clicking directories expands the directory tree one level at atime The Tree menu also expands the selected directory e Select Tree Expand One Level to expand the selected directory one level e Select Tree Expand Branch to expand all levels of the selected directory e Select Tree Expand All to expand all directories and subdirectories in the selected drive window This may take quite some time e Select Tree Collapse Branch to hide the directory levels below the selected directory 201 N etwork A pplications Sorting Files and Direct
165. es the necessary keystrokes 116 Terminal Emulation Reference Table 5 DEC Compose Key Sequences Composite Character Key Sequence opening brace vertical line 7 tilde space cent sign c or C or c or C pound sign l or L or l orL yen sign y or Y or y or Y section sign so or SO or s or S currency sign xo or XO or x0 or X0 xE8 copyright sign co or CO or cO or CO a feminine ordinal indicator a or A angle quotation mark left lt lt is 117 TinyTERM Emulator 118 Table 5 DEC Compose Key Sequences Continued Composite Character Key Sequence tilde A c a z E o E sn x8B I umlaut N tilde Ae O x95 O grave O xA 2 O acute Terminal Emulation Reference Table 5 DEC Compose Key Sequences Continued Composite Character Key Sequence U x96 U circumflex US Y x9B Y umlaut Nig German small sharp s ss a acute a circumflex a tilde a umlaut aring ae ligature ae e grave j eacute e circumflex e umlaut a gt w gt o l v v v x61 Qe w l v Ool fed N g nE M gt gt OM Ms OO ojojoj o 119 TinyTERM Emulator Table 5 DEC Compose Key Sequences Continued Composite Character Key Sequence o grave o o acute o circumflex 0 o e ligature oe o slash o u grave
166. escription Remember Window If checked windows retain most recent size the next Size time you start FTP Load Last Directory If checked file lists retain most recently selected top Specified directory at next startup Autoload drives on If checked all local PC drive windows open when Startup FTP terminates open again at next startup This includes network drives and CD ROM drives Iconify Output If checked output window is minimized at startup To Window view output restore window Table 5 Preferences Options List Item Description File naming collision If a file is copied to a local location where the same behavior for Local file name exists either overwrite the fiel default or files rename the file with a numeric extension File naming collision If a file is copied to a remote location where the same behavior for Remote file name exists either overwrite the file default or files rename the file with a numeric extension Proportional resize If checked drive and output windows resize windows based on automatically when you resize the main window frame window 205 N etwork Applications Table 6 Preferences Misc Options Item Description Logfile name If checked output is sent to the text file you specify in Output to Logfile the Logfile name field If unchecked output goes only enabled to the output window Use this option if you need to save or print the output E Mail Address Enter your e mail ad
167. etup Users Setup Groups Setup Exports NFS Server Log to File This item works as an on switch for the Log File If a check is placed on this item events occurring on the N FS Server will be recorded in the Log File Without a check mark events will not be recorded To have the ability to change this option the Log File must be set up first Log File Setup This option will be used to set up the file to be used to log events on the NFS Server After selecting this option enter the desired directory and file the events should be recorded to If the name of the file or the path name is not known click FILES The file to be used may then be searched for Usually a tmp temporary file is used for log files This file will need to be maintained by clearing the dntries to the file Refer to the specific operating system documentation for printing and clearing this file Events that will be logged to this file include such items as transfers and startups of the Server daemon functions and other N FS functions The history may then be reviewed as required Setup Server Changes may be made to the operation of the server within this option The following are detailed descriptions of each of the options available e ServerOn This checkbox will turn the Server on and off Click this box if the Server should be initialized on startup e Start M inimized This option determines whether the Server will be initialized as a full
168. etup screen found in the Windows Print M anager or the Control Panel Printers utility M ake sure the printer setup is correctly Select the file to print Select File Print Click Yes Select any of the printing options then click OK Customizing the Program and Screens FTP may be customized in a variety of ways For example Show or hide the toolbar drivebar and status line Set startup options such as remembering window sizes and which drive Windows is to open Set window options such as background and text color tiling or cascading Send output to a text file Options Menu To begin select Options Preferences The Preferences screen is divided into tabs labelled Layout Startup Options and Misc For details see the following tables 204 Century FTP Table 3 Preferences Layout Options Item Description Toolbar Icons If checked show toolbar If unchecked hide toolbar Also found in Options Show Toolbar Drivebar Icons If checked show drivebar If unchecked hide it Also found in Options Show Drivebar Status Line If checked show status line If unchecked hide it Also found in Options Show Status Line Left Right If checked windows line up across the screen Top Bottom If checked windows line up from top to bottom Overlapped If checked windows pile on top of one another so only the title bars of underlying windows show Table 4 Preferences Startup Options Item D
169. figured does not apply to Windows 95 users See the Seating up the Dialer in section in this manual Troubleshooting Network Connections If a problem is encountered while connecting to the network always check the N etwork Status Line at the bottom right of the screen to see if the network is active UP or inactive DN This section describes some common problems and presents some suggestions for troubleshooting Find the description below that best matches the problem and try the corresponding solutions 141 Century TCP LAN DN If the network is down carefully examine the network installation referring to the Network Addresses section of this manual if necessary If running Windows 3 x or Windows for Workgroups without the Windows for Workgroups network also check the network driver messages as the PC starts Select the Ping tab to test the following PC s IP Address This ping test should always succeed if the network card is properly configured No data will actually be sent to the network ping will simply verify a response between the PC and the network connection A Host IP Address on the Network This test will simply verify that a host IP address has been setup on the network Try to select a host that is not across a gateway for this test A Host IP Address across a Gateway This verifies that the specified gateway is correct Name Resolution For the three tests described above perform the same oper
170. files transferred to be followed Symbolic links are similar to pointers or associating files If a symbolic link is established betw een two files accessing one of the files provides the system with the location or address of the second file 2 Memory caching allows the smooth flow of data when transferred This eliminates a machine on one end waiting for a machine on the other end causing sporadic speed The data will flow continuously and will be stored in memory until the computer is ready to useit 197 Century NFS File locking File Locking prevents more than one user accessing a specific file at the same time This will prevent two users storing changes made to a file where the changes made are stored for only one of the users Show dot files Makes files and directories visible that begin with a period For example login Configuring the Network Drives After installing Century NFS the NFS Host must be mapped as a drive on the local PC To map the NFS drive perform the following steps 1 Select the Network Neighborhood icon The display for the network will depend on the setup of the individual PC 2 From thelist of network components select the Entire Network then NFS Servers component Select the desired host from the list of available hosts then select the exported directory The available hosts displayed are those hosts that have been entered inthe Server Management described on page 195 Then sele
171. for packet size window size and receive acknowledgment are determined by the baud rate of the transfer as follows 78 Transferring Files Table 5 Sliding Window Protocol Defaults by Baud Rate Rate Size Size ACK 300 1200 256 1024 256 2400 512 1024 256 256 4800 9600 1024 1024 14400 57600 1024 2048 512 The initial packet and window sizes are loaded from a table The receive acknowledgment frequency is calculated to be the current window size divided by four TinyTERM monitors the communications channel during file transfers and adjusts the above parameters at certain intervals The WTERMCRC protocol sends CRC packetized data at full baud rate until the receiver ACK limit It then issues a receive ACK request and continues sending up until the window size limit or the next receive ACK checkpoint In addition to being asliding window protocol WTERM CRC automatically compresses data before sending it and automatically uncompresses the data when it is received This protocol supports multiple file transfers Both WTERMCRC and Zmodem protocols support TinyTERM s interruptible file transfers as long as TinyTERM is on both ends of the transfer Using WTERMCRC In order to use either of these protocols you must have TinyTERM on the local and remote sides To send and receive with a remote multi user system 1 Attheremote system prompt start TinyTERM in server mode How you start TinyTERM in server mode depends on the protocol
172. gging Levels Configuring Printer LPD The Line Printer Daemon LPD server allows a remote line printer client to print files on printers managed locally on the PC using LPD Century provides a simple way to print host files on a printer connected to the PC Options are provided so LPD may be configured to Set the system message logging levels Select the directory for print jobs Specify the amount of spool disk space that must always remain free Administer multiple printers either locally or on the network Print text only print jobs on local printers Control banner sheet printing and print job requests for each printer Accept or deny print requests on a per host basis Getting Started LPD print capabilities are provided when running Windows 3 1 Windows for Workgroups or Windows 95 However LPD for Windows 95 is not automatically installed when NFS is installed as it is for Windows 3 1 and Windows for Workgroups If running Windows 95 perform the following tasks if running Windows 3 1 or Windows for Workgroups skip this section 1 Select Control Panel from the main Windows 95 screen 2 Select the Network icon The Networks dialog will be displayed 243 N etwork A pplications 3 4 Select the Add button select Service then select the Add button Click the Have Disk button and specify the directory Plus NFS was installed to the default is c century and click OK Highlight the Century Internet
173. gram to process received data In this example the configuration for the transfer will need to be saved as an Icon inthe SavelCONect as function The transfer settings will then need to be set up with the Auto File Transfer checked as well as the Exit after Transfer Use Registered Apps after Transfer and the Automatic Data Compression The items that should not be checked in this case would be the Display Transfer Status Screen and the End of Transfer Acknowledge If aWord document is received from the host the transfer would be started after clicking on the Icon the file would be received and Word would be launched with the document automatically Transfer status 74 While transferring files TinyTERM displays the following screen unless you have turned the transfer status display off in the Protocol Setup Table 2 Transfer Status Dialog Box Fields Field Function Protocol This field displays the protocol in use during the file transfer FileName This field displays the name of the file currently being transferred In the case of multiple file transfers this field changes as each new file begins transferring Bytes Transferred This field displays the number of bytes transferred so far followed by the total number of bytes to be transferred If the WTERM CRC TERM CRC or Zmodem protocol is in use the total number of bytes to be transferred is available during receives as well This field is updated after every packet is sent
174. gs pressSC Or click on theCancel Button TERM Professional Emulator Changing the Advanced File Transfer Settings 1 From theFile TransferSetup dialog box click on the dvanced Button TheAdvanced Protocol Setupialog boxis displayed Figure 10 TERM Professional Advanced Protocol Setup Dialog Box Advanced File Transfer Setup Es Error Checked Protocol Setup Kermit Options Alternate Checksum X Add EOF Character to Transferred Files Echo Packets EOL Character 73 Memory for Wildcard Filename Expansion 2584 Length of Time Before Handshake Timeout fo NCE ane aed Wait for ACK 0 Length of Time Before Sender Timeout 20 Line Acknowledge 10 Length of Time Before Receiver Timeout fs ine Delo OE jo Zmodem W TERRICRE Packet Size XON Character 17 Zmodem WTERMCRC Window Size fo XOEF Character 19 2 The Error Checked Protocols group e Use 7 bit Protocol for 7 bit Connections This checkbox selects whether to strictly use 7 bit characters during file transfers If checked file transfers over 7 bit links use only characters between hex 20 7e and X which are printable characters This field should be unchecked for all 83 bit connections but checked for most networks e Add EOF Character to Transferred Files This checkbox controls the addition of an End Of File character to the end of a transferred file e Memory for Wildcard Filename Expansion This edit field specifies the number of bytes to allocate for filenam
175. he NETNAME command is used as follows NETNAME 8tring string Is the coded virtual terminal name handshaking string or local LAN adapter name The NETSTIME command This command is used to set th etBIO S M SN ET sendimeout value If the connection drops during high network traffic increasing or setting this value to 0 may solve the problem The NETSTIME command is used as follows NETSTIMEn n number of 1 2 second intervals to wait for a network response before timing out 2 is the default value wait 1 second for a response before timing out 0 is the value for never time out Using NETPORT NETVTNAME and NETDIALOG The virtual circuit configuration for th penN ET transport is as follows NETPORT 76 NETVTNAME s VT NETDIALOG 4SiVTS S Fipc1 2 OpenNET networks uses the character v as the 16th character in NSN et name The ASCII value of v is 76 OpenN ET networks require that the virtual terminal server name is equal to the user specified node name with VT appended to it 103 TERM Professional In order to get a virtual terminal line with a amp tpenN ET network the following handshaking occurs ASIVTS S Search for the string iVTS F Flush further input iPC1 Z Send the string iPC 1 followed by a null character Table 1 Default Virtual Circuits Configurations Interrupt Network Vector Port VT Name Handshake NetBIOS User None nodename sco User Send V
176. he changes to the script then select Notepad s File Save 5 Exit Notepad To change login scripts or connect manually simply selectthe File Name list box and select a script by name or select Manual Connect The next time a connection is made Dialer will use the new setting Login Script Commands Be aware of case sensitivity when specifying text string arguments with the following login scripting commands The waitfor string must exactly match the string including case sent by the host All other commands that have text string arguments send their strings to the host machine For these commands case sensitivity depends on the host machine Typically host machines running UNIX operating systems are case sensitive whereas machines running VMS operating systems are not The following table provides the commands available with a brief description for each one 159 Century TCP Table 1Command Listing 160 Command command string pause number prompt string flag slipaddr int int2 Description Sounds the alert tone on the PC This command might be used to indicate when a connection has been established between the PC and the host Sends a break signal to the host Some computers use the break signal as an attention character on a serial line The break signal has limited use in scripts for network connections Sends the specified string This command is designed for modem control Thus the string specifi
177. he printer on the network Some network printers may not havea remote printer name 2 Typein the Remote machine name and the Remote printer name if any and click OK From the main window files may be printed options changed and other features of LPR may be used The following pages provide detailed instructions on using each of these options File Menu Throughout the rest of this chapter the term drag and drop will be used To drag and drop an icon or a file select it by moving the cursor over the icon or file Press and hold down the left mouse button Drag the cursor by moving the mouse to the new location Theicon or file follows the cursor to the new location Release the mouse button to drop the icon or file to the new position Defining a New Printer To define a new printer the remote machine name and the printer name must be known Refer to the System A dministrator for this information The remote machine name is the host name or IP address of the machine that defines the printer yia LPD for the network Some printers define themselves to the network For these network printers the remote machine name is the IP address of the printer The steps to defining a new printer are as follows 227 N amp work A plications 1 Select File New Printer The Define N etwork Printer dialog displays 2 Enter the Remote machine name and the Remote printer nameand click OK A new printer icon with the names assigned are di
178. he recipient the sender s address and subject of the mail Delete Retrieved M essages This is used when EM ail is retreived When checked the messages will be copied to the local drive and deleted from the server Transfer Type This group of 2 radial buttons determines how transferred files should be treated If ASCII is selected text file conversion will be attempted Itis the 39 TERM Professional Emulator responsibility of the system receiving the file s to perform text file conversion If Binary is selected the file s will be transferred with no modifications Transferring files e To transfer the file s in the File Name field to a remote system click on the Send File s Button The remote system should be ready to receive files before this button is selected e To receive the file s in the File Name field from a remote system click on the Receive File s Button This button should be used only if the remote system has started sending the file s e To request the file s in the File Name field from a remote system click on the Request File s Button This button should be used only if the remote system is in server mode e TheSettingsoption allows changes to be made to the default file transfer configuration e To exit file transfer pres amp SC Or click on theCancel Button Changing File Transfer Settings To change the settings to be used when transferring files select the Settings button in the file
179. hen transferred This eliminates a machine on one end waiting for a machine on the other end causing sporadic speed The data will flow continuously and will be stored in memory until the computer is ready to use it Configuring NFS Printers Windows NT 4 x To have the printer show as available within Century NFS it is necessary to setup the printer in the Windows NTSettings Printers function Select theAdd Printer icon 1 The option is then given to have the printer set up as My Computer or as a network printer server Select theetwork printer server option Click next 2 Clickon the Century NFS Print Services icon 3 Select the correct host from the list displayed 4 Select the correct printer displayed for the host NFS Server The NFS Server n This Section Century NFS Server Guided Tour Century NFS Server The NFS Server may be setup for individual users or groups and may be used to set up directories to be exported including permissions for files included To begin using the server the server itself must be set up as well as the users and groups for the server Detailed explanations are included in this chapter for each of the items on the NFS Server M ain Screen Getting Started To initiate N FS Server select the Network Shared Files icon from the Century program group The following show the steps required for the initial setup of the N FS Server Detailed explanations for each of the options ca
180. his type of interface Networks which support BAPI include e 3Com TCP v1 2 HewlettPackardArpa Services for DOS v2 0 or higher TERM Professionaluses thebapidll exeexecutable to communicate with the network s BAPI driver To activatsa pidll exe add the following line to the windows section ofvin in windows load bapidll exe Once thew in inifile is changed restart Windows to have the changes to take effect BIOS Interrupt 14h INT14h Interfaces 100 TERM Professionals INT 14h driver can be used with any network software package which supports third party emulation programs that access the BIOS Interrupt 14h interface Examples of network software packages supporting other emulators include e Eicon X 25 e Racalinterlan e interConnections TES Wollongong WIN TCP for DOS Using emulation software packages with INT14h networks usually involve running an INT 14h redirect program before running the emulatiERM Professionals INT 14h driver has been tested with the networks previously listed H owever TERM Professionalbshould work with any standard BIOS Interrupt 14h interface See network documentation for further information on using INT14h Network Connections NetBIOS and MSNET Interfaces NetBIOS NetBIOS is the N etwork Basic Input Output System considered to be a standard interface on IBM PC and compatible systems SelddtetBI1OS or LAN M anager in the Port Selection field LAN Manager NetBIOS with a different vir
181. ication Port This is the port that is used to connect the computer to a serial or modem connection 145 Century TCP To start the N ew Connection Assistant at the end of using the Initial Setup Assistant click Specify New Connection Now in the Specify New Connection N ow or Later dialog To run this option at anytime select Tools New Connection Assistantfrom the main Dialer window Main Dialer Window When the Initial Setup Assistant is closed the main Dialer window will be displayed From this window databases of frequently used phone numbers modem types and login scripts may be created These database entries are then available when building or modifying connections Making a Connection Before a connection can be initiated the Dialer and at least one connection must be defined The simplest way to accomplish thisisto usethe Initial Setup Assistant to configure the Dialer then use the New Connection Assistant to define the first connection If these options were not used to setup the Dialer and the connection follow the instructions in Adding a New Connection and Changing the Dialer Settings on page 148 to set up the Dialer and define the first connection Initiating a Connection 1 From the top of the main Dialer window select the name of the desired connection from the Connection list 2 Click Connect The Dialer initiates a connection based on the definition of the selected connection If using a modem for the con
182. ifying a Host Recall List The Connect dialog allows you to modify a list of hostnames To display this dialog click the Connect button in the TN 5250 main window Adding Hostnames These step by step instructions explain how to add a hostname to the host recall list in the drop down list box in the Connect dialog You can get to this dialog either by clicking the Hostname button on the Connect dialog or by clicking File New on the menu bar 1 After the Edit Host Recall List dialog appears do one of the following e Adda single hostname Typea hostname in the Add Host to the Recall List field and click Add e Add several hostnamfmm the Hosts file Click the Host File button and the H ost File dialog appears Click on the hostnames you want to add click the Add to the Recall List button and click Done The Edit Host Recall List dialog appears e Add several hostnameshen you aren t using the kernel Click the Host File button and the Host File dialog appears Click Browse In the O pen Hosts File dialog click on a file containing host names and click OK In the Host File dialog click on the hostnaryesi want to add Click the Add to the Recall List button and click Done The Edit Host Recall List dialog appears 2 Click Donein the Edit Host Recall List dialog 3 To see the hostnamgsu added click on the down arrow by the Hostname list box in the Connect dialog Deleting Hostnames These step by step instructions explain how to d
183. ination Exclude Used for sending files only Al files but the specified file will be sent If a wildcard is used they will be excluded Turn off data compression This option must be specified on both the source and destination filenames This is the same as turning data compression off in the Protocol Setup 76 Transferring Files WTERMCRC and Zmodem WTERMCRC and Zmodem WTERMCRC is Century Software s sliding window protocol and stands for Windowed TERMCRC Zmodem is a public domain sliding window protocol These protocols are full duplex streaming protocols and include the capability to adjust the size of the packet length and window sizes for file transfers Sliding window protocols Sliding window protocols enhance file transfers by increasing information throughput File transfers of error checked protocols generate a dialogue between the sending and receiving software This dialogue consists of sending information and responding on the state of the received data If the communication line is slow or if there are long delays between sending and receiving like those found in satellite connections file transfers take more time A non sliding window protocol such as Xmodem or Ymodem sends one data packet and waits for the receiver s response before sending the next packet If there were a two second delay between signals the sending program would have to wait four seconds two out and two back for each packet di
184. ings that the Dialer automatically sends as part of the serial connection process Enter the appropriate command strings for the modem 150 Setting up the Dialer e Initialize A string of commands controlling such modem functions as data compression data rate and flow control Enter the initialization string from the modem manual If the correct initialization string is not known use the default settings that establish these conditions Compression On Error Correction On This is important if the modem speed is 9600 baud or greater Data Rate Fixed Hardware Flow Control On Software Flow Control Off Dial Standard modem dial command Enter the dial command from the modem manual This is typically ATDT Hang up Standard modem hang up command Enter the hang up command from the modem manual This is typically ATH These standard commands are valid for Hayes compatible modems If the modem used is not Hayes compatible the commands will need to be verified in the documentation for the modem used e Direct Serial Connection Without Attached M odem Indicates a direct line to the host When the connection is initiated no dialing occurs e PCMCIA Modem Indicates that the modem is installed ina 5PCMCIA slot of thePC 5 This is a Plug and Play compliant device The device is plugged into the PC and is automatically configured when the PC is started 151 Century TCP Settings On The COM Port Tab Th
185. instructions for the operating system in use After completing the instructions in this section refer to the sectidmstalling the Softwaren page10 Windows 95 TheTERM ProfessionaMdata entry is then complete The Summarize and Finish screen will be displayed showing the information selected for the install Click on the BACK button to make any desired changes Verify that the installation parameters contain the correct information Click on the CANCEL button to abort the installation or click on the FINISH button to proceed Selecting the FINISH button starts the installation of the actual components to the hard drive Windows 3 1 Windows forWorkgroups Choose the method the network uses to find configuration information Useuser defined settings Configuration information exists on this PC Choose this option when 11DHCP and BOOTP are not available If this option is selected the following information will be required this is the same information as the LAN Worksheet described earlier in this section 11DHCP and BOOTP are configuration utilities that automatically send the PC configuration when requested Ask the System Administrator if either of these options is available Table 2 Local Configuration Option Description The network name for the PC This name identifies the PC on the network PC_10 PC IP Address The IP address for the PC This address identifies the PC on the network For example 192 42 45 133 12 Gate
186. ion DEC VT320 VT220 Emulations SCO Console Emulation WYSE WY 50 Emulation WYSE WY 60 Emulation IBM 3151 Emulation This section lists the keyboard mappings and local print sequences for the various emulations supported by TinyTERM For the following tables E Escape f Control x hex string 109 TinyTERM Emulator AT386 Console Emulation Description The AT386 Console emulation is a full screen 25 line color emulation of the console on AT amp T and Interactive UNIX System V 386 and System V 4 Keyboard Layout 110 Table 1 AT386 Console Keyboard Layout AT386 IBM PC AT386 Keyboard Keyboard Byte Sequence F1 F10 F1 F10 EOP E OY Shift F 1 Shift F 10 Shift F 1 Shift F10 EOp EOy Shift F 11 Shift F 12 Shift F 11 Shift F12 EOz EOa T E A 4 E B Ea E C E E D ome Home E H PageUp PageUp E V nd End E Y Page Down Page Down E U Ctrit K eypad 5 Ctrit K eypad 5 E G nsert Insert E Ctrl Delete Ctrl Delete 127 ab Tab x09 Ctri Tab Ctri Tab x09 E Ctrl sc Ctrl sc Terminal Emulation Reference Table 1 AT386 Console Keyboard Layout Continued AT386 IBM PC AT386 Keyboard Keyboard Byte Sequence Enter Enter x0D Ctrl Enter Ctrl Enter x81 Ctrl Backspace Ctrl Backspace x84 Keypad 0 Keypad 9 Keypad 0 Keypad 9 0 9 eypad Keypad eypad Keypad eypad Keypad eypad Keypad Keypad Keypad Keypad Enter Keypad Enter Ctrl K eypa
187. ional Character Set Hex o 2 3 4 s 7 s s al s o o elF o wut sou erx exor ene ree ee es ar vr rr eee e pue 00 002 pcs oca max svn ers oan em sus fese rs os rs us ep t fats tote p pct E pep pet e National Replacement Character Set While 8 bit connections allow the display of multinational characters and special symbols 7 bit connections cannot because there are fewer characters to display To allow multinational characters over a 7 bit connection use the N ational Replacement Character N RC sets This applies to the DEC VT 320 7 and DEC VT220 7 emulations An NRC set replaces specific characters from the A SCII table with needed characters for a specific language TinyTERM supports 14 NRC sets 106 Character Sets American German British Italian Canadian Norwegian Danish Portuguese Dutch Spanish Finnish Swedish French Swiss Asan example of how the NRC set works assume British is selected as the character set The only difference between the American character set and the British character set is the hex value 23 The American character set uses a cross hatch and the British character set uses a pound sign Look at the IBM PC Character Set chart A is displayed in the hex 23 location If the British character set is selected this would be changed to Therefore whenever a hex 23 is sent or received a pound sign is displayed See Table 2 Table 2 National
188. irectory described above Click OK to save any changes made Configuring Finger The finger server returns information about logged in users and extended information about users whether or not they are logged in Finger waits for a connection on port 79 Once connected it reads a single command line terminated by line feed if the command line is null finger returns a retport of all logged in users If the command line contains a user name finger returns extended information about that user Configuring FTP The FTP server supports File Transfer Protocol logins from remote machines to the PC Remote FTP clients request the storage and or retrieval of files between the client machine and the server PC machine Remote users cannot FTP to the PC unless they are configured as users through the M anage Users tab or the FTP server allows anonymous as a login name and is enabled in Server Status FTP users must have passwords to log in The anonymous login name requires the user s electronic mail address Other user names require the password set up in the M anage Users tab 252 Printing Files LPR Printing Files LPR Getting Started 225 Printing 231 Controlling Print Jobs 233 Advanced Topics 235 Troubleshooting LPR Getting Started Choosing a Print Method TERM Professionabupports three different methods to print files to network printers The method selected depends on e Where the print file resides e
189. is aD EVICE such as a printer a DISK file a SPOOL utility or PrintM gr the Windows Print M anager If NONE is selected all data capture requests will be ignored Capture Mode Click on the down arrow to display options This pop up field specifies whetherdata is captured as an ASCII file aBINARY fileora MNEMONIC dump file CaptureFile Creation This group of 2 radio buttons determines how an existing capture file should be treated If APPEND is selected captured data is appended to the end of the existing file If OVERWRITE is selected the existing file is overwritten with new captured data This field does not affect data which is sent to a device or spooler Flush CaptureBuffer This checkbox controls if TERM flushes out the output buffer immediately upon receiving a capture off request This ensures that all capture data is written to the file or printed If checkd he output buffer will be flushed In thePrintergroup the following optionmay be changed PrinterFile or Device Name This edit field specifies where the data should go when printing is turned on Valid device names include LPT 1 LPT 2 and COM 1 through COM4 If a filenames specifiedand include a number sign TERM substitutes a two digit number from 00 to 99 to ensure that each print file has a unique name The numbers are incremented each time the print file is opened i e at the start of a TERM session not each time priist toggledon They start ov
190. issions and read write sizes The following are detailed instructions for entering or changing the information found in this screen User Authentication Authentication server Enter the name or IP address of the authentication server on the network This server runs software that confirms the user is authorized and enforces the assigned privileges Remote username optional Enter the user name for the authentication server Remote password optional Enter the user password for the authentication server Server Management NIS host This item is also optional INIS Network Information Services should automatically generate a list of valid NFS servers at Windows startup enter the name or IP address of a host NIS domain name Enter the name of the domain that includes the NIS host if one was specified in the field above For example pcx cen com After entering the required information cli kx to have the information saved and return to the network main screen or click on titimization tab to continue with the setup Optimization The network drive defaults should be entered and maintained using this screen A detailed description of each of the options is given 1A central database used on some UNIX systems for tracking machine names Refer to the UNIX documentation for details specific to the machine used R W Buffer Size The network card installed will determine the size of the buffer Check the network interface card
191. it If the file had no associated application and FTP opened the filein Windows Notepad the limit is 64K bytes this is N otepad s size limit Transfer fails Check the output window for error messages If any of the error messages refer to a failed connection see the suggestions under Unsuccessful connection to the host on page 213 Retry the transfer An intermittent network traffic problem may have been encountered and another transfer attempt may succeed Transfer takes too long If communication to the remote site is particularly indirect transfers may take a long time Similarly if attempting to transfer during peak network usage hours such as weekdays 9 to 5 transfers may be slow If possible check with the system administrator about reasonable transfer times File is corrupted after transfer If the file is a binary file e g executable file application program etc it may have been transferred in the wrong mode Select binary mode then transfer the file again If the fileis a plain A SCII text file it may have been transferred in binary mode and thus lost some of its formatting Binary mode doesn t convert A SCII carriage return line feed codes Either open the filein a text editor and reformat the file or set the transfer mode to text and transfer the file again 215 M anaging N etwork Services Managing Network Services n This Section Configuring Printer LPD Changing the Message Lo
192. ith the group ID of files that will be transferred to or from the UNIX machine If the group ID does not match the permissions set for the file s transferred the transfer will not be completed Setup Exports Entire directories or specific files within the directories may be specified for 2export from the Server Select Options Setup Exports 2 Files and directories may be exported to other computers on the network 219 Century NFS 220 Directory Files Type the directory to export or select the desired directory from the pull down list Owner Select the correct user name from the pull down list displayed The permissions for the user the group the user has been assigned to as well as the permissions for Other will be displayed The permissions may be changed as necessary for the export
193. itiate the transf er from the Main M enu or Quick Keys To receive with TinyTERM from a remote server 1 Run the protocol in send mode on the remote system 2 Initiate the transfer from the M ain Menu or Quick Keys FTP TinyTERM supports the network file transfer protocol FTP If you can connect to a TCP IP network that supports FTP you can take advantage of the extremely high transfer speeds FTP supports Using FTP TinyTERM will automatically connect to your network host login initiate the transfer and disconnect when it finishes You do not need to place the remote system in server mode or log into the remote system This means that in a network with two or moreUNIX computers on the network you could be logged into one machine and transfer to a completely different machine through FTP Itisimportant to verify your Advanced Protocol Setup just before making aFTP transfer Otherwise your transfer could go somewhere unexpected In order for FTP transfers to work you must have set up the H ost User Name and Password fields in the Advanced Protocol Setup Transfers are initiated from the Main Menu or Quick Keys FTP will make transfers to or from the login directory of the user name specified 8l TinyTERM Emulator EMail Protocol EM ail may be used to send files as attachments The sender must type in their sever name the username and password In addition the address of the recipient must be entered and a subject may b
194. l machine TEM P directory TEMP is a DOS environment variable used by Microsoft Windows to designate a temporary storage directory OR To spool print jobs to a specific directory unselect Use local machine TEMP directory and enter the directory path in the Path box If the exact pathname is not known click Browse to select the desired directory path then click OK LPD enters the pathname automatically in the Path box When in the Select Diretory Path dialg box clicking Network allows the creation of paths to remote machines If running Windows 3 lor Windows 95 the Network button does not displdy 5 Specify the amount of space reserved by LPD for spooling print jobs The default is 4096 K bytes 4 megabytes 6 Click OK to accept the changes and return to the Services main window Defining LPD Printers When defining anew LPD printer enter the name to be used by the network for the printer This printer name must also be known by the LPD client machine sending print jobs to the PC machine Select the Properties button from the Windows 95 N etwork dialog then To define a new LPD printer 1 Select the Services tab A list of managed services displays 2 Highlight the desired printer then click onthe Configure button 3 Select Printer Connections 245 N amp work A pplications 4 Click New The Specify Printer Name dialog displays 5 Enter thename of the printer for the PC The name entered should
195. lation of the console on AT amp T and Interactive UNIX System V 386 systems and System V 4 IBM 3101 terminal Supports block and line mode IBM 3151 terminal D efaults to a 24 line emulation IBM 3151 terminal D efaults to a 25 line emulation WYSE WY 60 scancode mode emulatn Automatically selected if Wyse60 is selected and the application requests it SCO UNIX Color Console This is a full screen 25 line emulation of the console on SCO UNIX and XENIX systems Scancode mode is also supported in this emulation Pass through or teletype mode All characters received are displayed on the screen and no special escape processing is performed TeleV ideo 912 terminal emulation TeleV ideo 925 terminal emulation TeleV ideo 950 terminal emulation 29 TERM Professional Emulator VT320 DEC VT320 terminal emulation Includes support for M ultinational Character Sets compose characters label line transparent printing double high double wide characters numeric keypad and more VT320 7 DEC VT320 terminal emulation with N ational Replacement Character Set supportwhich allows foreign character display over 7 bit connections VT220 DEC VT220 terminal emulation with M ultinational Character Set support VT220 7 DEC VT220 terminal emulation with N ational Replacement Character Set support VT100 DEC VT100 terminal emulation VT52 DEC VT52 terminal emulation WYSE60 WYSE WY 60 24 line terminal emulation Includes support for 1
196. lator 1 To change a character within a code page file select the value to edit in the pop up list box If Input code page was selected in th ode Page to Editdialog the pop up list box will display the H exadecimal values of the input code page values 0x01 through OxFF or If Output code page was selected in thGode Page to Editdialog the pop up list box will display the TERM Professional Character Set TCS values The character corresponding to the pop up list box value is displayed to the left of the pop up list box 2 In theEdit field make the desired changes to the character value The Edit field will display the H exadecimal value of the TCS character if editing input codes pages or the output code page value if editing output code pages The edit field corresponds to the character mapping in the output code page or the character to be displayed from the TERM Character set A complete listing of TCS values and glyphs is available from Century Software Inc 3 Enter the new filename to save the character mappings in the Filename edit box This new file name will appear in th ode Page Settingalialog box as a choice in theC ode Page Settingsields Enter a description of the code page mappings in thescription edit field 5 If the Build inverse table check box is checked an inverse code page mapping will be created for input code pages if output pages were edited or for output code pages if input pages were edit
197. lator e Word Length Click on the word length needed within the group box If parity must be even or odd word length must be 7 Otherwise connections with no parity must have a length of 8 e Stop Bits Click on the number of stop bits needed within the group box The only time two stop bits are used is at a low speed like 110 baud therefore the Stop Bits should rarely need to be changed e Flow Control4 Select the desired flow control from the list available The option selected will depend on the system in use as well as the device used To accept the new settings without connecting click on thx button To reject the new settings click on th ancel button Modem Settings If the Port Type is set as a M odem the Phone N umber including Area Code and Country Code may be changed as well as the number of times a redial will be attempted if the connection is not made the modem configuration may be changed as well as location information To change the connection information type the desired connection from the drop down list or click on N ew to configure a new connection As many connections as desired may be configured For detailed information on the M odem Configuration please refer to the specific modem documentation Location information will need to be obtained from the System Administrator Locations that have been configured on the system may be displayed by clicking on the pull down menu and selecting the desired locatio
198. le Properties command of Program Manager The Run command is used to run the application once The Properties command should be used when you will frequently need to run the application with the same default parameters On the TN3270 command line you can specify the hostname port profile and whether to force Telnet negotiation These four command line parameters may be used together or in any combination however hostname port number and the Telnet negotiation flag take precedence over the profile name If any or all of these parameters are specified on the command line along with a profile name the values specified in these parameters override the corresponding values specified in the profile Hostname must be preceded by h The hostname must bea valid hostname or IP address on the network If a valid hostname is specified on the command line connection occurs immediately Otherwise no automatic connection attempt is made The application starts using the values of any other parameters specified and you need to initiate connection to the remote host yourself Port number must be preceded by p A port number may be specified on the command line without hostname when a special port is needed for several sessions but a different host is to be used for each If no port is specified the Telnet port 23 is assumed Telnet negotiation can be forced on a non Telnet port by using the t parameter The t option is only necessary when c
199. leave a message and wait for a response Century Software is committed to resolving all problems within 24 hours However some resolutions require a longer period of time If the situation requires more time a representative will provide updates on the progress of the problem resolution Installing TERM Professional n This Section Prior to Install Collecting Installation Information Installing TERM Professional to a network file server Prior to Install Requirements Hardware A personal computer with 386 or higher processor e Fornetwork connections previously installed network hardware including an NDIS or ODI compliantetwork interface card OR e Forasynchronous serial connections a serial port dtayes compatible modem and an R S 232C cable to connect the serial port to the host or external modem 1The term network connection is used to describe all aspects of the connection between the PC and the network server This includes cabling and communication parameters set on the server and the PC 2 The board that allows the PC to talk to the network 3 This is acommantranmission method between computers and modems or dumb terminals The information is transmitted a single character at a time rather than strings of characters 4 H ayes compatible modems are an industry standard similar to IBM compatible PC s Commands used to tell the modem what to do as well as the protocol used
200. lick Add e Add several hostnamfmm the Hosts file e Click the Host File button and the H ost File dialog appears Click on the hostnames want to add click the Add to the Recall List button and click Done The Edit Host Recall List dialog appears e Add severahostnames Click the Host File button and the Host File dialog appears Click Browse In the O pen Hosts File dialog click on a file containing host names and click OK In the Host File dialog click on the hostnames want to add Click the Add to the Recall List button and click Done The Edit Host Recall List dialog appears Click Donein the Edit Host Recall List dialog To see the hostnamgsu added click on the down arrow by the Hostname list box in the Connect dialog Deleting Hostnames These step by step instructions explain how to delete a hostname from the host recall list in the drop down list box in the Connect dialog You can get to this dialog be clicking the Hostname button on the Connect dialog or by clicking File Delete on the menu bar 1 After the Edit Host Recall List dialog appears click on a hostnamein the Host Recall List field Click the D elete button Repeat step 2 until you have finished deleting hostnames Click the D one button To see that the hostnameere deleted click on the down arrow by the Hostname list box in the Connect dialog Using Command Line Connect Options Command line parameters may be specified using the File Run or Fi
201. lick O ptions Preferences Profile tab to display the options for saving changes to profiles Prompt Before Saving Changes Click here to be asked if you want to save changes to a profile before the changes are saved Save Changes Automatically Click here if you want changes to a profile save automatically without a prompt asking you whether to save the profile changes Ignore Changes Click here if you don t want changes to a profile saved Mapping Your Keyboard Keyboard M appinig provided because not all TN5250 Protocol keys are present on a standard PC keyboard Your terminal emulator provides default mappings for various keys on your PC keyboard You may wish to change these mappings add new mappings or erase existing ones All this can be done easily using the keyboardpper You can map any Protocol key to any PC key 10 Your mapper supports two type of interfaces A Graphical Interface enables you to conveniently change the mapping using drag and drop It provides you with an overall view of the current keyboard mappings in a user friendly manner A Dialog Box Interface provides the same functionality as the Graphical Interface but in a text format You can use the Dialog Box Interface if you do not havea mouse A In some Far Eastern Versions the Graphical Interface may not be available Only the Dialog Box Interface is available Keyboard Mapper Graphical Interface The graphical representation displays a window which con
202. llow the steps listed to set the authenticator enter the drive defaults buffer size file permissions and configure the network drives Installing Setting the Authenticator The authenticator is a PCN FS server on the network that validates the user name and password when determining which files if any the user may access and other information regarding privileges Prior to setting the authenticator in Windows 95 the N FS client must be added To add the NFS client perform the following steps 1 After selecting Control Panel from the main Windows screen select the Network icon Select the Add button select Client then select the Add button again Select the Have Disk button and specify thedirectory Plus NFS was installed to by default this is c century Select OK Select Century NFS Century Software Inc then select OK The Windows 95 Network dialog will then be displayed In the Network dialog select Century NFS Century Software Inc then select Properties Set the PCN FSD or N IS server to authenticate to as well as the permissions and read write sizes The following are detailed instructions for entering or changing the information found in this screen User Authentication PCNFSD host Enter the name or IP address of the 194 authentication server on the network This server runs software that confirms the user is authorized and enforces the assigned privileges Remote username optional Remote pas
203. lly assert voltages of 5 volts to allow 2 volts of noise margin On the control lines a positive voltage is considered the on state and a negative voltage is considered off This is the direct opposite of the case for the data lines If itis not known whether a device is DTE or DCE measure the voltage on pins 2 and 3 The transmitter should always have a negative voltage even when idle If pin 2is negative the deviceis DTE If pin 3 is negative the device is DCE Hardware handshaking 96 The remainder of the RS 232 lines are control lines Some types of equipment including modems aren t happy just to receive a stream of data They need to feel more in control through a process called handshaking In handshaking some preliminary communication between the two pieces of equipment must take place before data can be sent Serial and M odem Connections Let s consider what type of handshaking might be necessary between a computer and a modem in order to dial up another computer system First of all on an outgoing call the computer needs to know that the modem is available to make the call Then the modem needs to tell the computer that it has made a connection A computer DTE asserts pin 20 D ata Terminal Ready or DTR to show that itis ready A modem DCE asserts pin 6 D ata Set Ready or DSR When the modem makes a connection with another modem on the other end it asserts pin 8 D ata Carrier Detect or DCD to let the co
204. loaded from the Century directory comment them out by adding REM at the front of the line 3 Edit the autoexec bat file Century TCP adds the following command line to the file CA CENTURY NETBIND COM This line is redundant to the ban command inthe autoexec bat file placed there by Banyan VINES Delete the NETBIND COM command from autoexec bat 170 Using M ultipleN etwork Protocols 4 Editthe protocol ini file The location of this file is determined by the I parameter to PROTMAN DOS in the config sys file In this example the parameter in question is BAN see step 2 Ensure the following four lines arein the protocol ini file MAR_NDIS DRIVERNAME MAR_NDI BIN DINGS N ETWORK_CARD PCXNET_INT 0x60 Change the BIN DIN GS linein the MAR_NDIS section to match the BIN DIN GS linein the VINES _XIF section IBM LAN Support with Century TCP ThelBM LAN Support program allows IEEE 802 2 and NETBIOS programs to operate over asingleLAN IBM LAN Support includes a colletion of drivers that provide this capability The BM LAN Support DXMAOMOD SYSinterrupt arbitrator driver is always used It is combined with the other IBM LAN Support drivers depending upon the types of application programs accessed by LAN Support For diagrams and explanations of the IBM LAN Support driver combinations see Appendix B in the IBM LAN Support Program V erison 1 35 User s Guide The following table lists the included IBM LAN Suppor
205. lue in the Background C oltatbox Foreground Color Click on a color in thiistbox to identify the foreground color of the text for the field name or color selected in the Available Fididtbox Background Color Click on a color in thiistbox to identify the background color of the text for the field name or color selected in the Available Fididsbox The default background color often overrides the background color for a particular style or color so you may not see the background color change Sample This box displays a sample of the selected field showing foreground text against the background window using the color combination currently selected Attributes Tab Click O ptions Preferences Attributestbisplay options for using and displaying extended attributes Under TN 3270 special colors and highlighting display as extended attributes If you disable extended attributes the remote IBM mainframe can t display all possible attributes on your PC screen Enable Extended Attributes Check this box to allow use of extended attributes to display 3270 screens Extended attributes affect the colors displayed on you screen Show Attributes Check this box to physically display the following special characters in the first column of every field on the screen p identifies protectedphighlighted fields P identifies protected highlighted fields u identifies unprotectedphighlighted fields U identifies unprotected highlighted fields Button
206. ly Otherwise no automatic connection attempt is made The application starts using the values of any other parameters specified and you need to initiate connection to the remote host yourself Port number must be preceded by p A port number may be specified on the command line without a hostname when a special port is needed for several sessions but a different host is to be used for each If no port is specified the Telnet port 23 is assumed Profile name can be specified on the command line by using the d parameter If a profile nameis specified on the command line it is loaded automatically when the application starts If no profile name or an unknown profile name is specified the default settings of the Untitled profile will be used A profile name containing space s must be enclosed within double quotes You cannot createa profile from the command line For example TN5250 hMAC p1969 dprofile1 When you start TN 5250 with this command line it automatically attempts to connect to host MAC on port 1969 with the profile named profilel governing any connection settings not already specified by the other stated command line parameters A You may use or omit a space between the parameter eg h and its value eg M AC i e hM AC and h MAC are equivalent Using the Toolbar The TN 5250 toolbaprovides fast access to the most frequently used functions the menu commands that provide access to these functions
207. ment The comment field is optional If present however FTP uses the comment as a description For entries that have no description FTP uses a default description of the hostname entered 4 When the correct file appears in the File Name field click OK FTP copies the contents of the HOSTS file into its M aster List 5 Movea subset or all of the names in the M aster List to the Current List by selecting the names and choosing Move 6 When the Current List is complete click OK The hosts in the Current List should display in the drop down list labelled Hostname when Session Configure is selected Using the FTP Output Window FTP connections and transfers require many low level commands and feedback from the remote host FTP logs all of this information to the FTP Output window which by default displays at the bottom of the main window This output window is the best source of information for checking status tracking the progress of a transfer or finding out about errors Viewing the Contents of the Output Window To expand the output window and view its contents use the maximize button in the upper right corner of the output window If the window gets too crowded it may be cleared by selecting File Empty Log Window Logging Output to a Text File Follow these steps to send all subsequent output messages to a text file as well as to the output window 212 Century FTP L From the menus select Options Preferences
208. menu box upper lef corner or press the cancel button oS Tips are provided throughout the setup and operation a instructions for further assistance A basic definition of the word or phrase has been provided jn a footnote on the page as well as in the glossary in the bac of this manual Register the Product Please fill out the registration card and mail it within 10 days of purchase to ensure prompt service Registration provides a number of services including e Professional telephone technical support e Product announcements e Upgrade announcements e Special promotions e Point to Point Century s informative newsletter In addition valuable comments and suggestions help us to improve and develop products Preface If Assistance Is Required Century Software is committed to providing the highest quality support available This commitment extends to every dealer reseller and end user who purchases a Century product If problems are encountered when installing configuring or usr M Professional try these troubleshooting steps before calling the support number 1 Verify that all the requirements for installing and runni R M Professional are met Refer to the sectioPrior to Installation Chapter 2 in this guide 2 Verify that the computer modem software and cables are installed configured and connected properly 3 Review the appropriate section s of thkERM Professional manual If help is requi
209. mputer know that a connection has been established These voltages usually remain high during the entire transmission Figure 3 Usage of DTR DSR and DCD If the voltage on pin 20 drops it tells the modem that the computer is unable to continue transmission perhaps because it is down The modem will hang up the phone if acall isin progress If the voltage on pin 8 drops it tells the computer that the modem no longer has a connection In both cases these pins givea simple yes no report on the state of the transmission This form of handshaking is sometimes referred to as modem control There is a further level of handshaking that is used to control the rate of data transmission When transmitting large amounts of data at high speed it is possible that one end of a link may try to send data faster than the other can receive it To keep this from happening there is a flow control handshake that allows either end to prevent the other from sending any more data until it gets the go ahead When aDTE device is ready to send data it asserts pin 4 Request to Send or RTS If the DCE is ready to receive it it gives the go ahead by asserting pin 5 Clear to Send or CTS Data transmission then begins If the voltage on CTS drops at any time this tells the sending system that the receiver isn t ready for more data Since this flow control handshake is implemented in the serial port hardware itis considerably more efficient and reliable than the CTR
210. munications Setup Dialog Box Network Node or IP Address Port Number Port Selection 2 In the Port Selection list box clickn NONE to connect to neither asynchronous nor network communications links e NETWORK LOGIN to connect to a network A network service and connection type must be defined under thedvancedsettings e COMn to connect to a serial port TheNetwork COM Port or M odenbutton will be available depending on the selection made TheM odem selection is only available with Windows 95 Each of the options is described in the following pages Network If Networkis selected as the port th etwork Communicationdialog box will be displayed after clicking on thBetwork button In theN etwork Nodeypethe node name or Internet address In thePort Number edit field type the network port number to connect to If unsure of the port number leave this item blank Click the checkbox to change th xit On Disconnect setting When checked TERM Professional will automatically exit when a network connection closes In theLogin Typdist box click on the login type for network connections The Login Types are 25 TERM Professional Emulator TELNET Standard telnet access RLOGIN Standard rlogin access TELNET E Telnet access echo enabled TELNET B Telnet access binary mode TELNET N Telnet access SendEOL None TELNET L Telnet access SendEOL Linefeed In the N etBIO S M SN ET group enter the values for the followi
211. n To accept the new settings pres amp NTER Or click on theOK Button To reject the new settings pressSC Or click on theCance Button Customizing the Ribbon Bar SelectConfigure Ribbon Bar TheRibbon Bar Editodialog boxis displayed 72 TERM Professional Emulator Figure 29 TERM Professional Ribbon Bar Editor Dialog Box Ribbon Bar Editor x Button Number h h im gt E u J ie Ee S Button Title ZE ee es fm 7 Button Hint a ea r EN Connect to the currently defined r_ Erase Button Action l A Menu Command Ei LA i n C Macro r 5 F IX Use Default Menu Button a ey E a frf Connect M Options available include Button Number This field determines which number button is being edited To change the associated picture click on any of the bitmaps to the right of this field Button Title This edit field contains the name of the button to display on the ribbon bar Button Hint This edit field contains the ToolTip to be associated with this button Button Action These radio buttons determine what function is assigned to this button The options are M enu Command Selecting this option places a list of valid TERM Professional commands into the list box If the Use D efault M enu Button is checked the bitmap that corresponds to this command will be selected for you Macro Selecting this option places a list of macro files within the
212. n Configure window and re enter the User Name and Passw ord Make sure the password is typed correctly FTP can t verify the password until it tries to connect e If using an anonymous login FTP limitations may have been encountered on the remote host Some FTP services set limits on the number of anonymous logins allowed simultaneously or limit the hours of anonymous login availability Check with the host s administrator or documentation 213 N etwork A pplications The remote host you want is not listed Most likely the connection information was not saved for this host To connect select Session Configure After the required information is entered select Save Then select Connect The next time Connect button or Session Connect to Host is selected the FTP Select Connection Session list should include an entry for this host If a host list file using the Edit Known Hosts command was built recently the file may not be loaded If the host is listed in the main FTP HST file exit the FTP program and restart This loads the FTP HST file If this host is listed in a different file select Session Edit Known Hosts Load Fileand load the appropriate host list file Connection terminated Some hosts have a time out parameter that disconnects inactive applications after a set length of time If the PC is connected to a host but has remained idle the time out limit may have been exceeded Reconnect to the host I
213. n as noted in step 5 and click OK Click Close in the Printers dialog To print from a Microsoft Windows application 1 2 3 Start the Microsoft Windows application In the application select File Print Setup or File Print Printer Select the Microsoft Windows printer you have associated with the LPR printer and click OK To print the file select File Print Controlling Print Jobs Each LPR printer can be setup to print a specific number of copies and to delete files Printing Multiple Copies To specify the number of copies 1 2 3 232 Select a printer icon from the Printers Icon Bar Select Configure Misc Type the number of copies desired in Number of copies Printing Files LPR Deleting Print Files Before proceeding be sure the files should be deleted after they are printed LPR does not display a confirmation window before deleting the file To delete files after printing 1 2 3 Select a printer icon from the Printers Icon Bar Select Configure Misc Select Delete files after printing Cancelling a Print Job Although other print jobs can be highlighted in the Printer Queue Status window only print jobs owned by the user can be cancelled To cancel a specific print job 1 Or STAN es uh Select a printer icon from the Printers Icon Bar Select Status Click Remote In the Printer Queue Status window highlight the print job s to cancel Click Remove
214. n from the list displayed Changing the emulation settings 1 SelectConfigure Emulation or click on theEmulation Setup button on the Ribbon Bar 4 Flow control regulates the data sent between the computer and the device used For example when using a modem the modem will receive data from the computer the modem will then hold the data in its buffer until the remote host is ready for the information If the modem receives more data than the buffer can hold it uses flow control to temporarily stop data transmission from the computer 27 28 TheEmulation Setupdialog box is then displayed TERM Professional Emulator TERM Professional Emulator Figure 6 TERM Professional Emulation Setup Dialog Box Tomi Emision STM or_ Duster Mode ll Soveon Pogos 1 Notional Reptorowne Cha Set aweRaca gt Deploy Ole Oitihute os REVERSE Serock Patter Lines 0 Emad of Line Wrap T Use At Keys in Emulsions F BACESPACE fey Sundi DELETE F Use Mumbeckod Keypad F Bock Mode 2 The options which can be set are as follows Terminal Emulation Terminal Emulation is a pop up field Click the down arrow to display the list of available terminal emulations ADM1 ANSI AT386 IBM 3101 IBM 351 IBM 312 25 PCTERM SCOANSI TTY TV912 TV925 TV950 ADM 1 terminal emulation ANSI 3 64 G eneric ANSI emulation AT amp T UNIX System V 386 Color Console This is a full screen 25 line emu
215. n Login Scripts N ote the following rules and restrictions when building login scripts 163 Century TCP Table 2 Login Rules Feature Rule Max line length 160 characters Max string length 160 characters This restriction can be surmounted by continuing a single statement on multiple lines with consecutive transmit commands For example transmit xemacs l display bobs_pc 0 tramsmit fg white bg black transmit font 6x13 amp r Max commands per file No limit command statement Send characters at the rate of one character per 155 ms Sending nonprintable Use either characters to host The numeric decimal code for the character preceded with a backslash An escape character described in the next table To send non printable characters use the standard C escape characters listed in the Alpha Code or Numeric Code column in the following table For other non printable characters use a backslash followed by the decimal value of the character Table 3 Escape Code Listing Alpha Code Meaning Numeric Code back space 8 form feed 12 line feed 10 password See following paragraph carriage return 13 username See following paragraph vertical tab 11 164 Setting up the Dialer p and u produce special character sequences that are interpreted by the Dialer as amacro This macro emits an array of characters that corresponds to a password and username The password a
216. n addition FTP may be set to send periodic signals to the host to avoid this time out To do this select Session Transfer and select Send Keep Alives to prevent FTP host timeout The FTP program has a time out option of its own and could possibly have been exceeded Select Options Preferences Misc Select Disconnect inactive client after __ minutes To change the minutes value enter a new number in the Number field If the value is zero 0 FTP stays connected indefinitely A time out would have to be initiated by the remote host See the previous suggestion 214 Century FTP Remote host window shows no files If atop directory is shown double click to open it FTP doesn t build the whole file list until the desired directories are open This saves processing time File Preview does not work When Preview is selected FTP tries to open the file using an associated application If no association exists for the file FTP opens the file using Microsoft Windows Notepad Notepad displays text files correctly but if the file is not a plain text file the Notepad display won t look like the original file To make sure a file set an association for that type of file To set an association open the File M anager and select File Associate If the file is very large several megabytes for example there may bea problem previewing the file If the file had an associated application check that application for a file size lim
217. n be found inthe Guided Tour section of this chapter 1 Setup the Log File to be used to record NFS Server events This includes startups and transfers From the N FS Server Main Screen select Options Log File Setup 215 Century NFS 2 3 The Server itself may be customized for various options These options include turning the Server on starting the Server as minimized packet size of transfers whether or not the files will be transferred in UNIX format and whether or not the Server will be running as an authenticator for the network The group s that will be allowed access to the N FS Server must then be set up When users are set up the group the user belongs to must be entered as a valid N FS Server group The user as well as the group the user belongs to will determine permission rights to files exported using the NFS Server From the NFS Server M ain Screen select Options Setup Groups Set up the individual users that will have access to the N FS Server Select Options Userfrom the NFS Server M ain Screen The directories to be exported may then be entered These directories may be changed as often as necessary In addition User permissions for the directories may be changed as necessary within this option Fromthe NFS Server M ain Screen select Options Setup Exports Guided Tour After initializing N FS Server the following selections are available 216 Log to File Log File Setup Setup Server S
218. n names and passwords The standard TFTP protocol is lax about security issues If security is a concern use FTP to transfer files The TFTP directory path uses UNIX style path designators To change the directory to the Pq c Century directory specify c Century The options are given to allow changing the message logging levels specify the startup directory and restrict access to certain directories Select the Properties button from the Windows 95 N etwork dialog then 1 Select the Services tab A list of managed services is displayed 2 Highlight tftp The Configuration dialog box is then displayed Changes may be made to any of the following Message Logging Levels Choose the desired level the default is set to level 3 Messages are written to the system log file at the chosen level and below M essages with values greater than the chosen level are not posted For example if you choose level 5 levels 0 through 5 are posted to the system log file and levels 6 and 7 are not Startup directory Enter a pathname The pathname entered is used as the path for files without specified paths This is also the login directory for TFTP users OR Click Browse and choose a directory pathname 251 N amp work A plications Restrict access to the following directories Select the directories to provide clients access Clients cannot access any files or directories outside of the ones specified here and the Startup D
219. nalinis 213 M anaging N etwork Services l Configuring LPD sscsssscssssssesssssssessssesososssssosssssnssssnssiesssnesenesesnesse 215 Printing Files LPR LPD G etting Started css 225 Advanced T OpiCs seen 245 Troubleshooting LPR s ssssssssusannnsnnnnnnnanunnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnnananannanannnnnannnnanannnnan 249 NFS Client Server NFS Client Configuring Century NFS ccsscssssssssssssssessesssseesessseessssseesessseessesssessessseessansens 239 Advanced T Op iCS 0 c seen eee 257 TERM Professional GL OSSONY wisicasteecnctenecinietzrenciancawdesaeedinsicnnaddcesnesnennmis 237 Index viii Preface How to Use This Guide TheTERM Professional User s G uide provides an in depth look into how to use TERM Professionalto satisfy network needs This guide is intended for users and administrators of ERM Professional To fully utilizefERM Professionalit is beneficial to be familiar with the Windows operating system This guide assumes basic Windows knowledge and uses Windows specific terminology For help with Windows see the Windows documentation Conventions Used in This Guide Different type faces are used to provide visual clues to screen output keys and commands typed The conventions used are TERM Professional Table P 1 Keyboard and Text D ata Input C onventions Convention Description HELVETICA Represents a key to be pressed For example It also represents screen output such as system
220. nce Delete Character Delete EQ DeleteLine si Ctr gt Li C DEL C Ctrl Delete XF Ta gt gt TaN X09 Backtab Shift ab gt ER Es o Ee E Reun Ee XO LE o CEnere XO Entr KeypadEntr SS Backspace Backspace AxB Brak OB o CW Beak Keypad 0 Keypad9 Keypad 0 Keypad9 09 Keypad Keypad Keypad Keypadd Keypad Keypad o a Keypad Keypad Keypad Ke pd eee Local Print Sequences The IBM 3151 emulation uses the following sequences On PR 0 EFE 128 TN3270 Emulator INTRODUCTION TO THE TN3270 EMULATOR CONNECTING TO A REMOTE TN3270 SYSTEM MODIFYING A Host RECALL LIST USING COMMAND LINE CONNECT OPTIONS USING THE BUTTON BAR STATUS DISPLAY FILE MENU FILE TRANSFER TAB SEND OPTIONS TAB HOST OPTIONS TAB EDIT MENU CONNECT MENU OPTIONS MENU EMULATION TAB SESSION CONFIGURATION DIALOG COLOR TAB ATTRIBUTES TAB BUTTON BAR TAB PROFILE TAB CONFIGURE BUTTON BAR DIALOG MAPPING YOUR KEYBOARD KEYBOARD MAPPER GRAPHICAL INTERFACE KEYBOARD MAPPER DIALOG BOX INTERFACE MAPPING A PROTOCOL KEY TO A PC KEY ERASING AN EXISTING MAPPING FONT TAB EXIT TN3270 ON DISCONNECT WINDOW MENU PROFILES Introduction To The TN3270 Emulator OONDAAATAHRWND TN 3270 Emulation permits a full screen full duplex connection from a PC to a remote machine running VM CMS TN3270 Emulation allows a PC to enulatean IBM 3278 terminal and gives the appearance of being logged in at
221. nd their PC equivalent For more information see M apping the Keyboard Most IBM mainframe software is designed around use with a terminal from the IBM 5250 family The IBM 5250 family of terminals are smart terminals that have more local processing capability than a common ASCII type terminal They operate in a polled block mode environment and normally use the EBCDIC character set The following is a functional description of the operation of the IBM 5250 family of terminals TheIBM mainframe computer sends a screen full of text with embedded screen format control information cursor addressing orders field types such as alphabetic numeric bypass etc as a block to the terminal The terminal has sufficient intelligence to allow you to move the cursor locally and insert and delete text as needed if the fidd definitions sent by the mainframe host allow it When the mainframe host s attention is required the user is done processing this screen full of information or has selected a menu option the user presses one of the command key2Faych as Enter Clear etc The fields sent to the mainframe host are defined by the Read command sent by the host The mainframe host then acts on the modified text or the menu item selected by either the cursor s position or the specific command key and sends another screen full of data to the terminal The command keys are important since IBM applications tend to be menu oriented fill in the bl
222. nd username correspond to the password and username entered in the Dialer s Standard Login Authorization Parameters dialog Access this dialog by selecting Connection Authorization Set Login Parameters Troubleshooting the Dialer This section describes common problems and presents some suggetsions for troubleshooting Find the description below that best matches the problem and try the suggestions listed for the problem Can t connect to the remote host when using a modem Is the modem powered on Is the correct COM port setting being used If unsure of the correct COM port for the modem try each one in sequence starting with COM 1 After changing the COM port setting click Connect in the main Dialer window with a known good Connection selected If an internal modem is used be sure that the modem s COM port is not being used by other devices in the computer If using a PCMCIA type modem be sure PCMCIA Modem is selected in the M odem tab then try the connection again If unsure of the modem type in use select generic H ayes compatible Also try selecting PCM CIA Modem in the M odem tab The modem isn t calling Is the modem powered on Is the modem securely connected to the correct COM port in the computer and the modem jack labeled LINE connected to an active telephone jack If the telephone line uses tone dialing does the Dialing string in Phonebook contain aT or aP if the telephone uses pulse dialing 16
223. ne and save connections for commonly used hosts How the connection is made depends on whether the connection has been defined Defining a New Connection When FTP is started it automatically prompts a connection to a remote host To create the first or anew connection follow these steps 1 Theprogram opensa dialog called Century FTP Configuration Info In this dialog fill in the Configure tab as follows Description Type a word or a brief phrase to refer to this connection This description should be description enough to allow selection from a list If a description is not entered FTP uses a default description that includes the host name and the user name entered Hostname The name or IP address of the remote host to connect to If a name is entered FTP asks the network software to find the host s address FTP can also check a user defined host name database FTP HST for the host s address For more information on using a host name database see U sing aH ost List File on page 210 User Name The user name login name for the account on this host Password The password for the account on this host The password will appear on thescreen as asterisks 197 N etwork Applications Use Anonymous Account Logon Optional Choose this option if planning to transfer files from a host using that host s anonymous account For example many Internet services allow the downloading of public files if logged in using the an
224. ne else or not bein a group the user can access No more local drives for connections Driveentriesin File Manager Disk Connect Network Drive Local Device or File Manager Disk Connect Network Drive PC NFS Local Device are based on the number of unconnected drives up to and including the designated LASTDRIVE in the CONFIG SYS file If more drives are needed adjust LASTDRIVE or disconnect some of the connected drives 213 Configuring Century NFS What to Know Before Configuring Century NFS The hostname of the machine providing PCNFSD version 2 x service must be known If this information is not known consult with the system administrator Windows NT 4 x Century NFS software is installed to Windows NT as an optional Client Protocol to be used when communicating with networks An icon is not installed in the Century Windows group Prior to using NFS Microsoft s TCP IP must be installed To verify that the TCP IP stack is installed use the following steps 1 2 D ouble click on th amp etwork icon in the Windows Control Panel V erify that TCP IP is shown as one of the listed installed network components inConfiguration If the TCP IP has not been installed it can be added by clicking om dd then onProtocol then on Add again This process will require the use of the Windows NT installation media For further details refer to the Microsoft Windows NT documentation To verify the correct address has been e
225. nect session You may create a new profile load an existing profile change the currently loaded profile or delete a profile without needing to restart the current application Connecting to a Remote Host Hostname Enter the name of the remote host to which you wish to connect or use the drop dokstbox to select a name from those previously entered The name must be a vahdstname alias or IP address on the network Profile Enter a profile name or select one from the drop dowhistbox A If the profile you select has hostname and or port number associated with it that DIFFERS from thehostname and or port you have entered manually your choices will be overridden by those of the profile If you select the Default profile the default values are loaded Port Enter a port number to be used for the connection If you re not sure which port to use use the Default setting Connecting to a Remote Host Using Your Network Hostname Enter the name of the remote host to which you wish to connect or use the drop dolktstbox to select a name from those previously entered The name must be a vahdstname alias or IP address on the network Port Enter a port number to be used for the connection If you re not sure which port to use use the Default setting Profile Enter a profile name or select one from the drop dowlastbox A If the profile you select has hostname and or port number associated with it that DIFFERS from thehostname an
226. nection the lights at the bottom of the main Dialer window show the status of the connection at any time In left to right order these lights are TD Transmitted Data e RD Received Data e TR Data Terminal Ready DTR e RS Ready to Send RTS 146 cs SR RI CD FE OE PE Setting up the Dialer Clear to Send CTS Data Set Ready DSR Ring Indicator Data Carrier Detect DCD Framing Error Overflow Error Parity Error When a connection is active and the main Dialer window is minimized the four modem lights on the bottom of the Dialer icon show the current status of the connection In left to right order these lights are TD RD CD GE Transmitted Data Received Data Data Carrier Detect DCD General Error Indicator lights whenever any error is detected For detailed explanations on each of the modem lights refer to the documentation provided with the modem in use Adding a New Connection To add anew connection 1 Click Add in the main Dialer window The Adding A N ew Connection dialog box displays Enter the name of the connection inthe New Name box Select a connection to base the new connection on fromthe Based U pon list Click OK 147 Century TCP 5 Modify any appropriate settings on the Connection tab M odem tab COM Port tab or Phone book tab as described in Changing the Dialer Settings next 6 Select File Save Changes to save any changes made Changing the Dialer Settings
227. network card and interface parameters e Configure Domain N ame Service DN S parameters e Configure gateway machines e Add change delete and locate H osts file entries Serial Connections If using a serial connection the only active tab in the Configure menu is the H osts File tab With it H osts file entries may be added changed deleted or located All other tabs in Configure will be inactive they are only used with PCs configured for LAN connections Configuring Network Card Parameters Existing Network Drivers If Century TCP inherited the existing network environment and network drivers the network card settings cannot be changed through Configure Network Card Century TCP Installed Network Drivers If Century TCP installed the network card drivers select Configure Network Card to modify the parameters for the specific network card that will be used Several different configuration parameters will be given depending on the network card that is displayed For example if the PC currently uses the 3Com 3C503 EtherLink II network hardware information that may be changed for that card is displayed Hardware interrupt O address and Transceiver type 131 Century TCP For each entry the current setting is highlighted Select the setting that matches the network card configuration Changing the Network Card Driver If a different network card driver should beinstalled and Century TCP installed the existing d
228. ng entry fields These options are only used if the selected N etwork is NetBIOS MSNET or LAN M anager Refer to the System Administrator for the required entry for each field Virtual Terminal Server Name Network Handshaking String NetBIOS Send Timeout Network Name String To accept the new settings click on th K Button To reject the new settings click on the CANCEL button Asynchronous Settings COM Port 26 The following items may be changed in for the COM M Port selection Baud Rate The baud rate is the speed of the serial connection roughly equivalent to bits per second Click the Baud Rate down arrow to display the list of possible values Click on the desired Baud Rate For a direct connection the speed should probably 8600 or 19200 For modem connections the speed depends on the speed of the modem being used and the speed of the modem used by the host TERM Professional will set the speed as specified when it opens the port Parity Click on the down arrow for the list of values Parity is a primitive form of error checking used before the development of more sophisticated communications protocols Even though parity is rarely used for error checking both systems must use the same value in order to communicate The possible values for parity are NONE EVEN ODD MARK and SPACE Parity of NONE should be specified unless communicating with another system that uses one of the other options TERM Professional Emu
229. nning without the Windows for Workgroups network see the NDIS Configuration for Microsoft Windows for Workgroups Netvsertion ODI Configuration for Microsoft Windows 3 1 The following is an example ODI Century configuration for Microsoft Windows ODI_DRV COM should be replaced with the specific network card ODI driver AUTOEXEC BAT C path LSL COM C path ODI_DRV COM C CENTURY MAR_ODI COM 0x60 C path IPXODI COM C path NETX EXE C path NET CFG Link Driver ODL DRV Frame Ethernet_802 3 Frame Ethernet_Il Frame Ethernet_802 2 Frame Ethernet_SNAP Link Support Buffers 12 1575 Century ensures that the proper Frame entry exists in the Link Driver section This Frame entry matches the option on the MAR_ODI COM linein AUTOEXEC BAT Run MAR_ODI COM without any options to see the list of available options ODI Configuration for Microsoft Windows for Workgroups Network Here is the same ODI example on an Microsoft Windows for Workgroups machine that is also running the Microsoft Windows for Workgroups network ODI_ DRV COM should be replaced with the specific network card driver 182 CONFIG SYS DEVICEHIGH C WINDOWS IFSHLP SYS AUTOEXEC BAT C WINDOWSI NET START C path LSL COM C path ODI_DRV COM C path IPXODI COM C path NETX EXE C WINDOWS ODIHLP EXE C path NET CFG Link Driver ODL DRV Frame Ethernet_802 3 Frame Ethernet_Il Frame Ethernet_802 2 Frame Ethernet_SNAP Link Support Buffers 12 1575 NetWar
230. nsfer If you do not want to display this status screen uncheck this field and TERM will display a series of periods on the emulator windowas the transfer occurs i e e End of Transfer Acknowledge This checkbox selects whetheF ERM s file transfer status screen requires acknowledgment at the conclusion of a file transfer command This option is checked by default which requires you to close the file transfer status screen manually If unchecked the file transfer status screen will display all information as normal but will close automatically at the conclusion of the file transfer command e Automatic Data Compression This checkbox selects whether TERMCRC and WTERMCRC perform automatic data compression to decrease the amount of time required to transfer files Uncheck to turn compression OFF e Convert Filenames to U ppercase This checkbox selects whether filenames are sent in all caps If checked TERM will create files with uppercase names on UNIX systems when those files come from DOS systems 41 TERM Professional Emulator Remote TERM CRC Control This checkbox selects control mode for file transfer In control mode TERM acts as a server waiting for REM OTE and file requests from a remote computer also running TERM 3 The External Protoca group Send This edit field defines the DOS command line necessary for sending files with the external protocol Receive This edit field defines the DOS command line necessary
231. nsmission Only two of the 25 pins are used for data transmission The standard also calls for secondary transmit and receive lines but they are rarely implemented Pin 2 is defined as Transmit D ata and pin 3 is defined as Receive D ata Since DTE uses pin 2 to transmit data and pin 3 to receive it and D CE does the reverse connecting a terminal or computer to a modem or printer DTE to DCE requires a straight through connection as shown here Figure 1 DTE to DCE Connection 95 TERM Professional To make a connection between two computers DTE to DTE acable is required with lines 2 and 3 crossed this is called anull modem or modem eliminator cable Figure 2 DTE to DTE Connection Pin 1is a safety ground and should be connected at one end the host end of a computer modem connection or either end of a direct link between two computers and left unconnected at the opposite end of the cable In a proper RS 232 implementation pin 1 of the port is connected internally to the frame ground of the system Pin 7 is the signal ground It provides the reference voltage against which other signals are measured It should be connected straight through A pin is said to be asserted when a voltage greater than 3 volts relative to signal ground is present on the pin On the data lines a voltage more negative than 3 volts is considered a binary 1 and a voltage more positive than 3 volts is considered a binary 0 Serial drivers usua
232. nt files before they are actually printed To select a spool directory perform the following steps 1 Select Control Panel Network or Control Panel Network PC NFS ona Windows for Workgroups network The Century NFS Network Configuration dialog is displayed Select Printers 3 similar to a cover page 208 4 NFS Client If the local machine s TEMP directory should be used as the spool directory select the appropriate box If a different directory should be used as the spool directory enter the path for that directory Click OK Connecting to a Printer To redirect printing from the PC to an NFS network printer the DOS device names LPT1 LPT2 or LPT3 must be associated with a printer on a network Once the association has been set up the print command of the Windows application may be used to generate print jobs To set up this association 1 2 Select Control Panel Printers Select a printer from the Installed Printers list Click Connect The Connect dialog is displayed Select any LPT printer port from the Ports list Click Network or Network PC NFS on a Windows for Workgroups network The Century NFS Network Printer Connections dialog is displayed Enter the network path in Network Path OR Click Browse to search hosts for NFS capable printers The Browse Century NFS Hosts dialog is displayed Enter an NFS host name or IP address in Host Selected and press RETURN Click an NFS h
233. nt to change the background and or foreground of a field which writes text in a particular color then you may choose that color from thelist box e Default Background lets you change the default background color which is usually black When you have selected this option the Foreground list box becomes grayed and you can choose a background color from the Background list box This color is then applied to the general background and to any fields that are using the default background If you then want to change the background of fields with only a particular text color select the color from the list box and choose the background color from the Background color list box Note that as you make any changes they are immediately applied to the other stylesjias sho the sample window For example you don t haveto exit the tab and re enter it to first alter the default background and then alter any green text O nce you close the tab the colors you have chosen are applied to the screen e All other screen attributes in the list represent the text color of the fields you can see on your screen Foreground Color Click on a color in this list box to identify the foreground color of the text color selected in the Available Attributes list box You can also create a custom color by selecting Custom from this box and using the Windows custom color dialog This list is grayed when you have selected Default Background from the Available Attributes list bo
234. ntered in the TCP IP stack follow these steps 1 Double click on theNetwork icon in WindowsSControl Panel 2 Select the TCP IP Network Component then seld toperties 3 TheIP address entered for the PC may be displayed verified and changed if necessary after clicking on th Address tab Follow the steps listed to set the authenticator enter the drive defaults buffer size file permissions and configure the network drives Installing Setting the Authenticator The authenticator is a PCNFS server on the network that validates the user name and password when determining which files if any the user may access as well as supplying other information regarding privileges Prior to setting the authenticator in Windows NT the NFS client must be added To add the NFS client perform the following steps 1 After selectingControl Panel from the M y Computer screen select th etwork icon Select the Client and then select thddd button Select theHave Disk button and specify the director erm Professionalwas installed to by default this is c century Selec SelectCentury Software Inc Century NFS Client for NT then select OK The Windows NT Network dialog will then be displayed 5 In the Network dialog selecBentury Software Inc Century NFS Client for NT then selectProperties Select New Server enter an NFS capable server and select OK Select Properties and set the PCN FSD server to authenticate to as well as the perm
235. number of bad packets are sent in sequence usually ten the transfer is aborted Files transferred in this manner provide a higher confidence in the data The data will either be received intact or it won t be sent at all The key to understanding error checking file transfers is to remember that they require two communications programs to be running one on each end of the link Furthermore both communications programs must support the same protocol TinyTERM supports the following error checking protocols Table 1 Supported File Transfer Protocols Protocol Source WTERMCRC Proprietary Xmodem Public domain XmodemCRC Public domain Ymodem Public domain Zmodem Public domain FTP TCP IP Network standard email Proprietary Transferring Files Public domain versus proprietary Each type of protocol has advantages and disadvantages Depending on speific needs either type may be right Public domain protocols are free and commonly available Many home PC users or bulletin board users rely on public domain protocols to communicate with other systems On the other hand TinyTERM s proprietary protocol is faster and more reliable By using automatic data compression and a more complex cyclical redundancy check these protocols are able to transfer files in less time than public domain protocols In order to use these protocols TinyTERM must be purchased for both the local and remote computer These protocols are commonly used in
236. o appear on your screen For information about inserting a foreign character click here Inserting a Foreign Character Using the Symbol Keypad To insert a foreign character using the Symbol Keypad e Place your cursor on the exact screen location where you want the foreign character to appear e Open the Symbol Keypatther by selecting Window Symbol K eyfpam the menu bar or by pressing the Symbol Keypbdtton on the toolbar e Click on the button displaying the character you want to use e Thecharacter now appears in the field You can always have the symbol keyed J ust move the window around so that it is out of your way by clicking and holding on the title bar as you drag it around the screen Profiles 18 A profile includes various settings used for a particular TN5250 session The settings include e automatic scaling of fonts on off e colors e emulation e fonts e force telnet negotiation e hostname e port e window position e window size e window state maximized restored Profilexan be created from the default settings as well as from an existing profile so you can start a new profile from scratch or base it on an existing profile Profile names can be as simple or descriptive as you like provided they are unique making the method of connecting to the remote host very user friendly Note that profile names are not case sensitive so Name and name are not considered unique Complete access to the list of
237. o a e g E EE AS 145 L gin SCHpts sesse aeaaaee n a aa aeia ea oie A 159 T EDE Troubleshooting the Dialer ssseseseenenssenssssssssosasenssensestssssesssessecssenaesssessssseeaees 167 Using M ultiple Network Protocols JELEKET 10 410 0 MPRA eit ee EN Ao Pee ae rt ee 171 vi IBM LAN Support with Century TC P sssssssssssnsusunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnanannnnan 173 Microsoft LAN Manager and Century CPRP sssssssssnsnsnnsnsannnnanunannnnannnnnnnannnnan 177 Novell NetWare and Century C P ssssssssssusnnnnsnnnununnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnannnnananannnn 178 TroubleShoOotinG sscssssesecessseesesseeseeesnenoesoesseeseessesesesoessoessnssnenensessnesnens 179 Network Addresses SSS NAW cece cc cce cacy E chactet es cae elas t 189 Address Class saiincinaintnsnctenctesccastenssnnssoncnnntnsntventhedtventnsdsnnssoctndnksnscttenteadtventeaceaces 189 Broadcast A ddreSSeS s ssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nannan nnna 191 Subnets and Subnets M aSKS sssssunssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnana 192 Gateways and ROU NG sssssssssnsusnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnanananananannnnnanananannananananan anan 193 aa fea tly ems ase se a fa Getting Started sen 195 U Sing FTP FeatureS scsscssssssssseesessseeseessescoesseeseesoecsessneansoessneseeesoesonssnesenonias 197 Advanced T OpiCs une eeeee 207 Bethe FT regener inradaisiniiiaaiinint a
238. o display the buttomltae shape of a box that can be placed anywherein the window Click on the box hold the mouse button down and drag the box to the desired location Show Caption If you have selected the floating button bar you can check this box to display a title on the button bar Top Click this radio button to display the buttoacbess the top of the window Bottom Click this radio button to display the buttoacbass the bottom of the window Mapping Your Keyboard Keyboard M appirig provided because not all TN 3270 Protocol keys are present on a standard PC keyboard Your terminal emulator provides default mappings for various keys on your PC keyboard You may wish to change these mappings add new mappings or erase existing ones All this can be done easily using the keyboardpper You can map any Protocol key to any PC key Your mapper supports two type of interfaces e A Graphical Interface enables you to conveniently change the mapping using drag and drop It provides you with an overall view of the current keyboard mappings in a user friendly manner e A Dialog Box Interface provides the same functionality as the Graphical Interface but in a text format You can use the Dialog Box Interface if you do not havea mouse A In some Far Eastern Versions the Graphical Interface may not be available O nly the Dialog Box Interface is available Keyboard Mapper Graphical Interface The graphical representation displays a window which con
239. ocal Print Sequences Although the actual SCO Console doesn t support local print TinyTERM s emulation does through the following sequences 122 WYSE WY 50 Emulation Description Terminal Emulation Reference The WYSE WY 50is a full featured Wyse 50 emulation This emulation supports most sequences with the exception of protected mode on off processing Keyboard Layout Table 7 WYSE WY 50 Keyboard Layout Wyse50 Keyboard F1 F2 F10 F11 F12 F13 F16 Shift F 1 Shift F2 Shift F10 Shift F11 Shift F 12 Shift F 13 Shift F 16 Tf l a gt lt Home Shift H ome PAGE N ext IBM PC Keyboard F1 F2 F10 F11 or Ctrl F1 F12 or Ctrl F2 Ctrl F3 Ctrl F6 Shift F 1 Shift F 2 Shift F 10 Shift F 11 or Ctrl Shift F 1 Shift F 12 or Ctrl Shift F 2 Ctrl Shift F3 Ctrl Shift F 6 ilH a Home Ctri H ome Page Down Wyse50 Byte Sequence A r ea Te AJ Tr AK r AL r AO r A Nr Aa r Ai 5 A r Ak r Aj r Ao r SK a L H XIE E EK 123 TinyTERM Emulator Table 7 WYSE WY 50 Keyboard Layout Continued Wyse50 IBM PC Wyse50 Keyboard Keyboard Byte Sequence PAGE Prev PageUp EJ Tab Tab Shift T ab Shift T ab EI Back Space Backspace H Ins Insert Eq Del Delete 177 Repl End Er INS Char Ctrl Page Down EQ INS Line Ctrl gt EE DEL Char Ctrl Page Up EW DEL Line Ctrl ER Send Ctrl Enter E7 Keyp
240. odem from the phone line Speaker status M 0 turns the speaker off M 1 turns the speaker on until a connection is established Pulse dialing command This command causes the modem fo use pulse dialing Result code display command Q 0 causes the modem to display the results of the commands sent to it For example OK Command executed RING Ring signal detected For further result codes see the modem documentation Q1 causes your modem not to display the results Auto answer command This commands sets the number of rings to wait before answering the phone S0 0 will cause the modem not to answer the phone S0 1 will cause the mode to answer the phone on the first ring Tone dialing command This command causes the modem to use touch tone dialing TERM Professional Table 3 CommonHayes Modem Commands continued Command Function Result code form command V0 causes results to be display numerically For example 0 OK 2 RING V1 causes the results to be displayed in verbal English form commands can be issued to it This command does not require the AT prefix Write configuration If the modem supports nonvolatile RAM this command will save the current configuration The RS 232 Standard 92 The type of cables required for directly connecting two computers or connecting a computer and a modem are defined by the Electrical Institute of America s RS 232 standard Just about every computer has one or more R
241. odifying Network Configurations Checking the Network Viewing Installation and Status Information Switching Between LAN and Serial Communication Methods Troubleshooting Network Connections Getting Started During installation Century TCP was configured to communicate either viaa network interface card or aserial port modem This chapter explains how to e Change Local Area Network LAN configurations e Check the LAN or serial connection e View LAN or serial installation and status information If Plus N FS was installed with LAN and serial port modem support see Swtiching Between LAN and Serial Communication M ethods on page 140 for information about switching between LAN and serial interfaces Running The Network Configuration Utility When installing Plus N FS an icon is created in the Century program group that can be used to configurethe Century TCP LAN and view information about the LAN and serial connections Look for the Century network icon in the Century program group Torun the Century TCP network configuration utility double click on the Century TCP icon The TCP IP main window will be displayed 129 Century TCP 130 From the main window LAN configurations may be changed the network may be checked and network statistics may be viewed The following provides an overview of the TCP IP window File Menu Refresh Statistics Describes events that have occurred within transfers Save Changes
242. oeravar f OF perar BCom berar zi o veran z armee Madeline Coto neraet zi om neran z Hink Coto neran z OF veran i a ee a 2 From this screen colors for the 5 basic attributes can be customized Each option allows the use of one of 16 foreground colors and one of 8 background colors The attributes which may be set are e Normal Color e Reverse Color If DEFAULT is selected reverse characters are displayed in the reverse colors of the Normal Color Black on White selected for the N ormal color would be displayed as White on Black in the Reverse color mode e Bold Color If DEFAULT is selected bold characters are displayed in the high intensity color of the foreground Normal Color e Underline Color If DEFAULT is selected underline characters are displayed underlined TERM Professional Emulator e Blink Color To assign colors to these attributes e Click on the down arrow next to the listbox containing the color to be changed A list of valid color choices will be displayed Select the desired color or e Drag acolor from one of the paint pots into the listbox containing the color to be changed All sixteen colors are valid for a foreground color Only the bottom row of paint pots the dark hues are valid choices fora background color 3 To accept the new settings pres amp NTER Or click on theOK Button To reject the new settings pressSC Or click on he Cancel Button Changing A
243. of NFS and logging back in If Restore at Startupis not checked in Control Panel Network Drives or Control Panel Network PC NFS Drives on a Windows for Workgroups network log in to the N FS network to connect network drives 1 Select Control Panel Network or Control Panel Network PC NFSon a Windows for Workgroups network 2 If the authenticator has been changed click Logout 3 Click Login 4 Enter the password entered in Control Panel Network Drives If the prompt for the password is not desired select the appropriate box 5 Click OK A status message momentarily displays confirming the network connection s local path and remote path Logging Out From Century NFS Logging outof Century NFS properly will verify that all network drives and printer connections are disconnected To logout 1 Select Control Panel Networkor Control Panel Network PC NFSon a Windows for Workgroups network 2 Click Logout 206 NFS Client Configuring NFS Printers Windows 95 To have the printer show as available within Century NFS itis necessary to setup the printer inthe Windows 95 Settings Printers function Select the Add Printer icon 1 2 The printer wizard information will be displayed Click Next The option is then given to have the printer set up as a local printer or as a network printer Select the network printer option Click Browse Click on the Entire Network icon Click on the NFS
244. on the network is selected to validate drive connection requests This validating server is called an authenticator The authenticator is a PCN FS server on the network that validates the user name and password for drive connection requests The authenticator s name or IP address was requested during the installation of Century NFS To view or change the authentication server 1 Select Control Panel Network or Control Panel Network PC NFS The Century NFS Network Configuration dialog displays 2 Select Misc If the following information is not known contact the system administrator This information may be obtained from the LAN Worksheet in the Installation section of this manual 199 Century NFS 3 Enter either a PCNFS server IP address or the host name in the appropriate box e g 192 86 85 160 This server must be running PCNFSD version 2 x SdSetermining the PCNFSD version on the serveon page213 The server entered for this item can be a different machine than the server providing drives and printers for network connections 4 Select Prompt for password at Windows startupto have NFS display a password dialog when Windows starts If the password entered in this dialog does not match the password setup inthe Control Panel Network Drives Passwordfield or in the Control Panel Network PC NFS Drives Passwordfield on a Windows for Workgroups network access to NFS is denied 5 If awarning message
245. on this item to select all text in the active screen i e the 24 or more lines visible when the application is maximized Connect Menu Connect Click on this item to conn ota remote host using TN 3270 You can load a profile by selecting its name from the list of profiles available or you can use the Default profile You are usually given a login prompt for the remote machine once the connection is made Connect also acts as a toggle Once you are in a session the Connect m rplays only a Disconnedmmand allowing you to end a session with one host but remain in the application to establish a session with a different host Because it is good practice to log off properly from host sessions you are prompted prior to the disconnection Abort Connect Click on this item to cancel an attempt to cotaertost Disconnect This item displays when you are connected to a host Click distoremety our connection to the host Options Menu Preferences This item allows you to specify the following options e Terminal Emulation O ptions e Field Attribute O ptions e Screen Colors e Button Bar Setup e Profile Update O ptions Remap Keyboard This item allows you to map the keys of the TN 3270 keyboard to your PC keys For more information see Keyboard Mapping Font This item allows you to select the current font For more information see Fonts Exit TN3270 on Disconnect This item toggles whether or not TN 3270 closes automatically wh
246. onnecting to a 3270 host on a non Telnet port i e a port number other than 23 If this option is not specified the default is to use Telnet negotiation on the Telnet port and not to use negotiation on all other ports Profile name can be specified on the command line by using the d parameter If a profilenameis specified on the command line it is loaded automatically when the application starts If no profile name or an unknown profile name is specified the default settings of the Untitled profile will be used A profile name containing space s must be enclosed within double quotes You cannot createa profile from the command line For example TN3270 hMAC p1969 t dprofile1 When you start TN 3270 with this command line it automatically attempts to connect to host MAC on port 1969 using Telnet negotiation as if you were connecting to port 23 with the profile named profilel governing any connection settings not already specified by the other stated command line parameters A You may use or omit a space between the parameter eg h and its value eg MAC i 2 hMAC and h MAC are equivalent Using the Button Bar The TN 3270 button bar provides fast access to the most frequently used functions the menu commands that provide access to these functions are shown below in parentheses for Connect Connect ea Disconnect Disconnect 8l Color Selection P references Color Keyboard Mapping PreferencB
247. ons dialog is displayed 6 Select a printer from the Current Printer Connections listin the Century NFS Network Printer Connections dialog 210 NFS Client 7 Click Disconnect The selected printer is removed from the list Advanced Topics File Name Mapping File naming conventions are the rules controlling what a file can be called The way that data is stored in a file is called file format The characteristics tracked by the operating system to manage files are called file attributes File naming conventions file formats and file attributes are different for DOS and UNIX operating systems Problems can arise when using one operating system to access files created on another operating system File formats and file attributes must be translated or mapped into the conventions used by the other operating system NFS maps filenames and file attributes using the following rules e All DOS names are mapped to lower case when they are sent to a UNIX host e g README TXT on a DOS system becomes readmetxt on a UNIX host e DOSfile names are case insensitive All DOS file names are upper case UNIX file names are case sensitive All UNIX names are mapped to uppercase DOS file names e NFS maps UNIX files that are longer than 8 3 that s eight characters plus a three character extension to a unique 8 3 character file name DOS file names longer than 8 3 are illegal e UNIX filenames containing a comma drop the comma when mapped
248. onymous login account When this option is selected the User Name field shows anonymous Enter the correct e mail address in the format username domain M ost FTP hosts use e mail addresses as passwords for anonymous logins If this host uses a different password enter that password instead Directory Optional Typethe default directory to work from on the remote host Enter the directory to be shown at the top of the host s file list If a directory name is not entered FTP will use the host s default directory for the account Click Save If this session information is saved it won t need to be entered the next time a connection is made to this host Click Connect FTP connects to the host logs in and opens a drive window for the host Using a Defined Connection 1 2 3 Select Session Connect to Host Select the description of this host connectio n from the list shown If the connection desired is not listed here follow the previous steps for Defining a N ew Connection Click OK Disconnecting From a Host FTP allows connection to one host at a time When finished with the connection to the host the connection must be terminated prior to connecting to a different host To disconnect do one of the following 198 From the toolbar select From the menus select Session Disconnect from Host Close the drive window for the host From the system menu in the upper left corner of the open
249. or received Percent Transferred This field displays the amount of the file transferred in percentage points This field is updated after every packet is sent or received This field is blank during receiving a file in any protocol except TERMCRC WTERMCRC or Zmodem Transfer Time This field counts the number of seconds of real time elapsed since the file transfer started Transferring Files Table 2 Transfer Status Dialog Box Fields continued Field Function Effective Baud Rate This field displays the effective disk to disk file transfer speed currently in process When data compression is in use if you are using WTERM CRC the value may exceed the modem baud rate The effective rate is calculated by dividing the bytes transferred by the elapsed transfer time Transfer rates may be fine tuned using the HIWAIT script command Number of Packets This field displays the number of file data packets transferred thus far over the communications line Restarts Retries This field displays both the number of times this transfer has been restarted followed by the number of bad packets in the current file transfer Last Error This field displays the last critical error message from either the local or the remote system M essages displayed here are deemed critical and not merely information If more than ten bad packets are sent in sequence TinyTERM aborts the file transfer and prints the message Transfer aborted n files transferre
250. or your account on this host For example billf e Password Enter the password for your account on this host It will appear in the password field as asterisks To learn more about connecting and this dialog see Connecting toa Host on page 197 3 Click Save then click Connect A new drive window appears as shown in the following figure Figure 1 FTP Main Window File Session Directory Tree Options Window Help ad sfe Ce pd ee Eele Cae lc Gp eye eye ep Gee Gels ey ex ely lz ftp FixDisk_C EC Gocentuy 3 12 96 6 33p Gaeudora 2 29 96 6 38p Eansoffice 2 20 96 3 36p Gonetscape 3 14 96 6 58p program files 2 19 96 7 22p Gorecycled 3 5 96 4 18p Etemp 3 14 96 7 01p Eawindows 2 19 96 7 20p Eovterm 2 29 96 9 46p Ett 2 29 98 10 09p C autoexec 000 2 29 96 10 11p Archiv C autoexec 001 2 29 96 10 11p Archiv C autoexec 002 2 29 96 10 11p Archiv autoexec bat 2 29 96 10 11p Archiv Start Fridge E My Co Volt o E4 Cense Centuy figACent BE 9 36AM From this main window files may be transferred files and directories can be managed and other features of FTP may be accessed 196 Century FTP Using FTP Features This section describes how to Connect to a remote host and view its files Transfer files between the host and the PC Manage files and directories on the host and the PC Customize the FTP program to accomodate specific needs Connecting to a Host FTP has the ability to defi
251. ories Files and directories may be sorted as desired using one of the functions found in Table 2 Table 2 File Directory Sort Options To show Choose All files and then directories Session View Sort Mixture Files Dirs All directories and then files Session View Sort Mixture Dirs Files Intermix files and directories alphabetically Session View Sort Mixture InterM ix default Files and directories without regard to uppercase and lowercase Session View Sort Mixture CaseFold Changing the Top Directory Displayed To change a drive window to display a different directory at the top 1 Makesure the drive window to be changed is the active window Click anywhere inside the window to makeit active 2 Select one of the following OR Directory Change Directory 3 Enter the directory displayed at the top of the window 4 Click OK Use this command to reset the window to its default display Creating a Directory 1 Typethe path name where the new directory should be created 2 Select one of the following OR Directory Create Directory 3 Enter the name of the new directory 4 Click OK 202 Century FTP Deleting Files Through FTP files on the PC and files with access permission on the remote host may be deleted 2 3 To delete Select the file s to delete To select several adjacent files click on the first file then hold down the Shift key and click on the last fil
252. ormation cursor addressing orders field types such as highlighted non display numeric etc as a block to the terminal The terminal has sufficient intelligence to allow you to move the cursor locally and insert and delete text as needed if the field attributes sent by the mainframe host allow it When the mainframe host s attention is required the user is done processing this screen full of information or has selected a menu option the user presses one of the command key2Faych as Enter Clear etc Usually only fields that have been modified by the user Read M odified are sent back although the mainframe host can request a dump of the entire screen buffer Read All The mainframe host then acts on the modified text or the menu item selected by either the cursor s position or the specific command key and sends another screen full of data to the terminal The command keys are important since IBM applications tend to be menu oriented fill in the blanks user interfaces If the user presses the command key but the mainframe host has not yet responded the keyboard will become locked and the only keys available are the R eset or Attention keys A locked keyboard is indicated by the cursor located in the lower right corner of the screen Connecting To A Remote TN3270 System You may establish a TN 3270 session using the C ontwacimand on the Connentenu or by pressing the Connediutton on the button bar Hostname The drop down
253. ort when receiving data or will display OK when sending data The data displayed on the screen will be the same The progress of the transfer will be reported along with the type of protocol used the file name the last error and the last message encountered If data is being sent to a remote system and the information displayed is correct click the OK button tocontinue with the transfer If data is being received from the remote system the A bort button may be clicked to stop the transfer at any time Wildcard transfers Some protocols support the use of wildcards when specifying files to transfer The following wildcards are acceptable Matches any number of any character Matches any single character M atches each character enclosed in the braces e g chO 123 would match files named ch01 ch02 and ch03 Settings To make transferring files more efficient transfer settings may be entered and stored to avoid having to enter the information for every transfer The different options are described in detail 72 Transferring Files Auto File Transfer If this box is checked the file transfer will begin sending receiving or requesting file information whenever TinyTERM is initiated Exit After Transfer This option will exit TinyTERm after the transfer is complete Use Registered Apps after Transfer When receiving files that have a registered extension i e doc for Word this option when checked will in
254. ost namein NFS Hosts to bring up a list of mountable printers Double click a mountable printer in Mountable Printers The N etwork Path box is then filled in 209 Century NFS 10 Select a printer port from Printer Port The selected printer port is redirected to the NFS printer not the port selected in step 4 11 Click Connect Century NFS Network Connection Results is displayed Click OK 12 Click Close in the Century NFS Network Printer Configuration dialog 13 Click OK in the Connect dialog 14 Click Close in the Printers dialog Note The Restore at Startupand Print Banner Pageoptions are set as they have been entered in the Century NFSNetwork Configuration Printersvhere the default printer settings were selected These settings may be modified to this specific printer connection Printing Files Using NFS Once an NFS printer is connected to a Windows printer that device may be used for printing using the standard print command of the Windows application From most applications select File Print or File Print Setup Disconnecting from a Printer To disconnect a current printer connection 1 Select Control Panel Printers 2 Select a network printer from the Installed Printers list 3 Click Connect The Connect dialog box is displayed 4 Select a printer port from the Ports list 5 Click Network or Network PC NFS on a Windows for Workgroups network The Century NFS Network Printer Connecti
255. pecific host machines can be selected to have the ability to print to specific LPDs using the Access Rights for the LPD To define access rights Select the Properties button from the Windows 95 N etwork dialog then 1 Select the Services tab A list of managed services displays 2 Highlight the desired printer and click the Connect button 3 Select Access Rights Within this selection the following options are available e Add ahost machine e Allow or deny access to any of the listed host machines e Change the position of the host entries in the listbox e Removea host machine Each option is described in detail in the following pages After making all the desired changes within this selection click OK Adding a Host Machine To add ahost machine select the Properties button from the Windows 95 N etwork dialog then 1 Click Add The Specify RemoteH ost dialog box displays 2 Either enter ahost nameor click Any Host Selecting Any Host adds an entry allowing all hosts to use LPD 3 Click OK The system adds the host name as the first entry in the listbox 249 N amp work A plications Allowing or Denying Access to a Host Machine To allow or deny access to a host machine select the Properties button from the Windows 95 N etwork dialog then 1 Selecta host machine from the Host Entries listbox 2 Click Allow Access or Deny Access Each host entry is preceded by or Hosts preceded by are allowe
256. ppy disk drive The network software in the PC will use the information given when the drive is mapped to redirect the user to the correct place in the network 14 TERM Professional Emulator ICON ect Summary The Summary button brings up dialog which allows entry of detailed information about the tap file Items include author date subject version e mail and description Print Screen Prints the currentmulatior screen to the printer The emulation screen is actually text so a graphics printer is not necessary to use this function File Transfer Displays the File Transfer dialog box Refer teansferring Filedater in this chapter Open URL3 URL will control the type of link that will be used when transferring and receiving files Refer to th ransferring Filedater in this section Edit Text File Displays an edit file dialog This allows the user to edit a text file using the defined editor Change Directory Displays a change directory dialog This allows the user to change the current directory Erase File Displays an erase file dialog This allows the user to delete a file Install Language A different language may be selected to have TERM Professional run in The directory and file s for the language must be known in order to install an additional language Exit Exits from TERM Professional to therogram M anager An emulation program is one that acts as a sort of translator for a terminal or PC When inst
257. puter or electronics stores There are several complications most computer manufacturers configure the serial ports on their computers as DTE ports however some configure them as DCE Furthermore some manufacturers use female connectors for DTE ports or male connectors for DCE In addition to save space on crowded boards many manufacturers have adopted a more compact 9 pin connector in place of the standard 25 pin connector As a general rule if the system manufacturer provides standard modem cables for use with the system TERM ProfessionaWill run correctly with them RS 232 cables consist of up to 25 wires each with a specific function and each intended to carry a different signal Only two of the wires are commonly used for data transmission the rest are used for various kinds of control signals A piece of equipment a computer or a modem sends a signal across the cable by applying a small positive or negative voltage to a specific pin in the cable s end connector The signal is carried through the wires in the cable to the corresponding pin at the other end where it is detected by another piece of equipment The voltage may either be held high positive as a go ahead signal or may pulse quickly to convey data with the sequence of negative and positive voltages being interpreted as binary codes Unfortunately as it has now come to be applied the RS 232 standard is rather broad and leaves a lot up to the equipment manufact
258. r always appear in the title bar of the LPR main window To set the default printer 1 Selecta printer icon 2 From Configure Misc check Set as the default printer A shortcut method is 1 Move thecursor over the printer icon and press the right mouse button The Quick Menu displays 2 Select Make Default Printer The first printer defined is automatically set as the default printer Changing the Printers Icon Bar The LPR window shows the defined printers asiconsunder Printers in the Printers Icon Bar To create a personalized printer description for these printer icons 1 Select Configure Misc 2 Typea description inthe Description field up to a 255 characters When the cursor is held over the printer icon the printer description appears The printer icons are arranged in the Printers Icon Bar with the most recently created icon appearing last in the list These icons may be re ordered in the list Just drag and drop the icon to a new location within the Printers Icon Bar The Remote machine name and the Remote printer name of the currently selected printer icon appear on the right above the Printers Icon Bar 229 N amp work A plications Using a Banner Page For each printer icon created a banner page option may be selected A banner page acts like the cover sheet for a fax it provides the name of the person sending the print job the name of the file and usually the date and time the file was print
259. ransfer Button on theRibbon Bar TheTransfer Filedialog box is displayed Figure 9 TERM Professional Protocol Setup Dialog Box Transfer File s x File Name l Send File s Receive File s Destination J Request File s Transfer Protocol WTERMCRC Transfer Type ASCII Binary 2 Options availabe include e FileName This edit field contains the file to be transferred Wildcards may be used 38 TERM Professional Emulator to transfer more than one file If the file name to send is not known click on theBrowse icon to determine the correct file name Destination This edit field contains the destination directory for the file s being transferred This defaults to the current directory represented by a period Transfer Protocol This list box determines the protocol to use for the file s being transferred If FTP is selected the FTP H ost button is enabled allowing configuration of the FTP hostname username and password If using EMail protocol to send this is the EM ail address of the person to send to The following screen will be displayed when using the EM ail protocol EMail Protocol ix EMail Server I Password EMail Address Subject I Delete retrieved messages Server Type the server name Username The username and password entered will be used by the EM ail Server used EMail Address Theaddress and subject entered will be used when sending the EM ail to show t
260. received from the modem when a valid command has been received and acknowledged For Hayes modems itis OK Error The string received from the modem when a command is rejected Busy The string received from the modem when a busy signal is encountered while attempting a call Ring The string received from the modem when itis ringing For H ayes modems itis RING followed by a carriage return No Carrier The string received from the modem when a call was not completed due to a carrier signal not being detected from the remote modem No Dialtone The string received from the modem when a call is attempted and a dial tone is not detected on the telephone line 51 3 TERM Professional Emulator Press ENTER or click theClose button to return to thM odem Profile Setup dialog box Changing DDE Settings 1 SelectConfigure DDE TheD ynamic Data Exchange Setugialog box appears Figure 13 TERM Professional Dynamic Data Exchange Setup Dialog Box TERM Pee Server Mowe WIERM Caso J Hosest Tiwosut 5309 mseos The following DDE settings may be changed e EnableD ynamic Data Exchange This checkbox controls whetheFERM Professionakccepts requests for DDE conversations TERM Professionakerver name This edit field changes the name used by a DDE client to request a D DE conversation with ERM Professional Request timeout This edit field sets the number of secondBERM Professionalwaits for a Request reply before
261. red please contact Century Software By mail Century Software Inc ATTENTION Technical Support 5284 South Commerce Drive Suite C 134 Salt Lake City UT 84107 By phone 801 268 3088 By fax 801 268 062 ATTENTION Technical Support By E mail tech censoft com By 24 hour FACTS by FAX line 800 FAX ADVICE 800 329 2384 Century Software s FACTS by FAX line offers answers to some of Technical Support s frequently asked questions Century Software is committed to quality in technical support To ensure this a Technical Support Representative will respond to requests for assistance within 24 hours of the initial call Orby 24 hour BBS 801 266 0330 Baud 300 to 14 400 V 32 bis WordLen 8 Stop Bit 1 Parity NONE Emulation SCOANSI xiii TERM Professional Century Software s BBS provides help in the following ways Preface General help through BBS mail and conferencing non interactive Download services e Updates of Century products e Sample scripts written by support personnel and end users e Technical support documents including technical help papers Upload services e Questions for technical support Phone support Century Software s Technical Support is available weekdays from 8 00 a m to 5 00 p m M ountain Time except for the following holidays New Year s Day Memorial Day Independence Day Labor Day Thanksgiving Day Day After Thanksgiving Christmas Eve Christmas Day Support line proc
262. response back from the printer you will see SY6 DMr status bar You might speed the server along by pressing the ATTN key on the Auxiliary Keypad e Inan error state If this is the case you need to press the Error Reset key on the Auxiliary Keypad before you can continue CAPS This field on the status bar tells you whether or not you have thedapa by displaying CAPS you do All letters you type appear as uppercase letters NUM This field on the status bar tells you whether or not you hAMentieock on by displaying NUM you do Insert This field on the status bar tells you whether or not you have thkdysertby displaying INSERT if you do If you arein I nseriode you do NOT delete characters as you type When you are not in Insertmode you delete characters as you type over them Column This field on the status bar tells you the colimmmhich your cursor is located Row This field on the status bar tells you theinowhich your cursor is located Message This field on the status bar indicates that the server has sent you a message Auxiliary Keypad The auxiliary keypad contains extra signal keys not available on your keyboard You can open the keypad either by choosing Window Auxiliary Keypad or by clicking on the Auxiliary Keypad button on the toolbar 15 Auxiliary Keypad Keys PF1 PF24 These are TN 5250 keys not found on a standard keyboard PA1 PA3 These are TN 5250 keys not found on a standard keyboard suppo
263. resses were used To use the ping utility perform the following steps 1 Select Ping 2 Enter the host s name or IP addressin the Host Name or IP Address box 3 Click Start The response displaysin the Status window 136 N etwork Connections Click Stop if the ping attempt should be terminated Viewing Installation and Status Information The View Installation and View Status tabs show the current network configuration and network activity Viewing Installation Specifications To view the choices made during installation select View Installation The following describes each field that is displayed Hardware Network Card Physical Address Interrupt 1 O Port DMA Channel The name of the network card in use The Ethernet Address that identifies the network card If the physical address is zeros the network card NDIS or ODI drivers are improperly configured The hardware interrupt number used by the network card If grayed out this typically means that the interrupt number is configured automatically by the software on the network card Refer to the network card documentation for more information Aninput output address used by many network cards to pass data If grayed out this typically means the I O port is either not used or is configured automatically by the software on the network card Refer to the network card documentation for further infomation Direct Memory Access DMA channel
264. rint Queue Control Choose from the following options to control print requests Table 1 Print Queue Control Options Option Function Allow new print jobs Honors new print job requests allowing them to accumulate in the local queue default Disallow new print jobs Does not honor print job requests requests do not accumulate Resume job printing Starts printing jobs accumulated in the print queue default Pause job printing Stops printing the current print job Options for Text only Print Jobs If the printer name is associated with a local Windows printer additional options may be selected for text only print jobs Table 2 Text Only Print Options Landscape orientation Four pages per physical printed page Wrap long lines Lines longer than the width of the printable page are automatically wrapped to the beginning of the next line otherwise lines are truncated Show page borders Borders print around each page when there is more than one page printed per physical page Font used for printing Fonts other than the defauls are available in the listbox M anaging N etwork Services Print banner sheets for each print job Select this option to print banner pages Banner pages one page printed before each print job identifying the user printer and document being printed allow multiple users to easily identify and separate their print jobs Click OK to save any option changes Specifying Access Rights S
265. river rerun the Plus N FS installation program See the section Installing Plus N FS for further information Configuring Interface Parameters Configuring Local Interface Parameters Before configuring the interface parameters the following configuration names and addresses must be available e PC name e PC internet address e Subnet mask identifier e Broadcast address Contact the System A dministrator for the information necessary to complete this screen To configure the local interface parameters 1 After double clicking on the Century TCP icon select Configure Interface 2 Enter the name of the PC on which Century TCP isinstalled inthe PC Name box 3 Enter the Internet address of the PC on which Century TCP isinstalled in the PC IP Address box 4 Enter the subnet mask identifier in the Subnet M ask box 1A subnet mask is used to identify subnet partitions on the network This is a way of dividing up the network to designate specific PC addresses to each subnet 132 N etwork Connections The subnet mask identifies machines on the network and subnet N etwork addresses are 32 bit numbers A portion of the 32 bits identifies the network subnet and the remaining bits specify machines within the network subnet Subnet masks have bits set to 1 in the network and 0 in the machine portion of the address Refer to Appendix C Subnets and Subnet M asks 5 Enter a broadcast address that is an address common to
266. rotocol driver must be used This file is available on the Artisoft bulletin board in the AINDIS EXE self extracting file This file is included in the LAN tastic version 6 0 and above 169 Century TCP Banyan VINES and Century TCP Century TCP and Banyan VINES can work simultaneously on the PC network adapter via NDIS network card drivers Only certain versions of Banyan support N DIS drivers Banyan VINES version 5 5 or higher must be used The following instructions assume that Banyan is configured to use N DIS drivers Refer to PCCONFIG and M anaging VINES Workstations in the Banyan documentation for NDIS configuration information After configuring Banyan for N DIS perform the following steps 1 Install Century TCP Century TCP detects the current N DIS configuration While making no changes to the N DIS configuration items are added to the config sys autoexec bat and the protocol ini files 2 Edit the config sys file The following line should be included in this file DEVICE C BAN PROTMAN DOS 1 C BAN The parameter provides the name of the directory that contains the protocol ini file There are several other drivers loaded from the BAN directory one of which is the N DIS driver for the network board Typically the filename extension for the N DIS driver is dos Below the protman dos device name verify that the following line is included DEVICE C CENTURY MAR_NDIS DOS If there are any other drivers
267. rpreted If the address is not interpreted during this time the connection fails sound lt WAV file Plays the specified Windows wav file The file name must be enclosed pathname gt in double quotes and can optionally include the full path If a path is not specified the following directories are searched in order Current directory Windows directory Windows System directory directories specified in the PATH statement When specifying a path be sure to use double backslashes to indicate a single change in directory level For example sound C WINDOWS TADA WAV If the specified file is not found the default sound specified by the SystemDefault entry in the sounds section of the win ini file is played If no default sound is specified no sound is played transmit string Sends the specified string as fast as possible that is with no pauses between characters This command does not work well for sending commands to modems For modem commands use command waitfor sting int Makes the PC wait for the specified inteval in seconds for the specified string to be sent from the host If after waiting the specified interval this string is not received the PC times out the login script is aborted and the Plus NFS View Log window displays the following error message Script Reader Waitfor tmeout The specified string is searched for using a case sensitive comparison waitfori string int Sames as the above waitfor command
268. rted by TN 5250 Duplicate Clicking this button fills a field from your cursor to the end of the field with a special dup character This character will appear as an asterisk on your terminal This button can be convenient when you are in a field that can t contain null characters Field Mark Clicking this button fills a field from your cursor to the end of the field with dugpehiaacter This character will appear as a space on your terminal This button can be convenient when you are in a field that can t contain null characters Help When you arein an error state indicated by an error message number towards the bottom of your screen and SYSTEM on the status line you can click this button to request help from the server O ften the server returns text explaining the error After clicking Help the message number appears white to show that your request is being processed When you done reading the message you need to click the Error Reset button to return to a normal state Error Reset When you arein an error state indicated by an error message number towards the bottom of your screen and SYSTEM on the status line you can click this button to return to a normal state If you decide to use the Help button you still need to click the Error Reset button after viewing the message to return to a normal state Clear Click this button to send a signal to the server to clear your screen Erase Input Click this button to eras
269. ructions are sent to the terminal or the PC the emulator will translate the instructions the program sends into a form the terminal or PC can understand gt Uniform Resource Locator A resource is a disk drive printer modem CD ROM or other hardware device that can be shared on the network URL will determine which device is to be used for the transferring of files 15 Edit TERM Professional Emulator Copy Copies the selected emulator screen text to the Windows clipboard Paste Copies the text in the Windows clipboard to the currently active connection Paste Link Copies the text links from other Windows applications to the emulator screen Clear Screen Clears the emulator screen Configure 16 The Configure options are discussed in detail later in this chapter This listing serves as a short description for reference Communications Change the communications settings of a configuration Emulation Change the emulation settings of a configuration Data Capture Printer Change TERM Professional s printer options M odem Windows 3 1 Workgroups Change the modem settings of a configuration DDE Change TERM Professional s default D DE settings Keyboard Change the keyboard settings used by TERM Professional Color Change TERM Professional s default color settings Fonts Change the font TERM Professional uses for the emulation window Login Change the automatic login settings of a configuration
270. ry NFS R W Buffer Size The size of the buffer will be determined by the network card installed Check the network interface card documentation for allowed buffer sizes Read Size Select the size in bytes for each N FS read transfer If the PC network card can handle 8192 byte packets select 8192 If a decrease in performance is experienced due to lost or dropped packets decrease the read size to the next lowest value Write Size Select the size in bytes for each NFS write transfer For maximum performance select 8192 If a decrease in performance is experienced due to lost or dropped packets decrease the write size to the next lowest value File Permissions File Permissions determine the rights and privileges users will have when accessing files on the system Users are assigned to one or more groups Each group on the system may be a specific department or have common duties that require access to certain files If a user is assigned to a group the user will have acdess or privileges to the same files as the group they are assigned to It is possible to assign one user to numerous groups if necessary Detailed explanations for each of the permission selections is given below User Read Allows theuser to view print and copy files created on NFS drives Write Allows the user to modify and delete files the user created on NFS drives Exe Allows the user to execute files the user created on NFS drives
271. s correctly for TERM this option will automatically search the hardware configuration and display available modem ports and the maximum baud rate for each port Test To test the modem click the Test Button This will send the initialization sequence to your modem and verify that the settings that you have specified are working correctly Saving the Settings e To accept the new settings pres amp NTER or click the OK button 47 TERM Professional Emulator To reject the new settings pressSC or click the Cancel button e To save the modem settings under a selected name click teve As button TERM Professional Emulator A modem configuration profile name will be prompted Enter the name to use and pressENTER or click the OK button The modem profile will be added to TERM s modem database and will appear as an entry in the Modem Profile pop up field PressESC or click the Cancel button to exit without saving the modem profile Changing the Advanced Modem Settings From theM odem Profile Setuplialog box click on the dvanced Button TheAdvanced M odem Profile Setugialog box will be displayed Figure 12 TERM Professional Advanced Modem Profile Setup Dialog Box Command Strings Result Strings Initialization Connect CONNECT Dial Prefix ATT Auto Connect CONNECT Z Dial Suffix M ok jok sit s Hangup ATHZzM o Error RRR OffHook ATAM O Bus eus Escape Ring Rine Auto Answer ON ATSO 1 M No Carrier NOCARRIER A
272. s displayed Figure 1 TERM Professional Main Screen TERM Pro Default Configuration The TERM Professional window has the following components M enu Bar Ribbon Bar Session Bar Control M enu 13 TERM Professional Emulator e TitleBa e Iconify Minimize Button e Maximize Button Menu Bar TERM Professional s M enu Bar offers easy access to most features The M enu Bar is located at the top of the window and looks like this Figure 2 TERM Professional Menu Bar File Edit Configure Action Help File e Open ICONect Displays a dialog to select the correct configuration file for the connection to be made O ptions include e OK Loads the configuration file into memory but makes no connection This option is useful for changing parameters in the configuration without making a connection Click on the Connect button on the Ribbon Bar to establish a connection e Cancel Exits without making any changes to the current configuration e Network This option allows thenapping of a network drive e SavelCONect Saves the current configuration information as described later in this chapter e SavelCONectAs Displays a file save dialog This allows the user to save the configuration to a different configuration file Mapping drives is a fundamental concept for networking With a network drive mapped on the PC the drive appears to theuser as a local drive just like the hard drive or the flo
273. s minimized 22 TERM Professional Emulator To re activate the window double click on the same icon 23 TERM Professional Emulator Maximize Button Clicking on theVaximize Button enlarges the window to the size of the screen When maximized this button changes to a double arrow for Windows 3 1 ora double file in Windows 95 Click again to reduce the window to its original size Using the Help System The TERM Professional help system takes full advantage of the Windows Help System The Windows Help system is used to allow access to H elp functions for specific applications about specific topics and bookmarks may be maintained for frequently visited help screens If assistance is required in any section of TERM Professional there is an on line Help system that explains what to do The Help option of the menu runs a separate program under Windows and therefore may be left running concurrently while working in TERM Professional To access Help e SelectHelp Contents Help Search for Help On or press theHelp button on theRibbon Bar To exit Help e Double Click the system menu located in the upper left corner of the Help window e Select close from the Help window system menu Changing Settings 1 Select Configure Communications or click on theCommunications Setup button on the Ribbon Bar TheCommunications Setuglialog box will be displayed 24 TERM Professional Emulator Figure 5 TERM Professional Com
274. sed to select the current fstytefrom those available for the selected font Size Thislistbox is used to select the point size of the selected font Sample This box displays a text sample using the currently selected font font style and font size Fit Font to Window Auto Scale This feature allows you to enable automatic scaling of fonts to fit the current TN 3270 window size Note that the automatic scaling featureis only available for fixed width TrueType fonts Exit TN3270 on Disconnect When this menu item is checked the TN 3270 application automatically closes whenever you disconnect from a remote host Window Menu Show Button Bar This menu item toggles the display of the Button Bar Using the Button Bar Show Auxiliary Keypad This menu item toggles the display of the Auxiliary Keypad Center Text Horizontally This menu item centers the text displayed in the main TN 3270 window If you turn this option off the text is left justified Center Text Vertically This menu item centers the text displayed in the main TN 3270 window If you turn this option off the text is closer to the bottom of the screen Profiles A profile includes various settings used for a particular TN3270 session The settings include automatic scaling of fonts on off auxiliary keypad on off button bar on off colors emulation exit on disconnect on off fonts force telnet negotiation hostname line wrap on off line mode
275. splayed in the Printers Icon Bar Selecting a Printer Protocol Some network printers do not support the Line Printer Daemon LPD protocol or only support LPD in a limited fashion LPR supports a number of common network printer protocols If the protocol the printer uses is not known leave the Configure Protocol Available Protocols entry in its default LPD setting If it is known that the printer does not use LPD 1 Select Configure Protocol Select a protocol from Available Protocols Click Configure The options for the selected printer are displayed Fill in the necessary option information Click OK nu eR Won Creating a Desktop Icon for a Printer A printer icon can be created for the Microsoft Windows desktop and then printed by dragging and dropping a file onto that icon To create a desktop icon 1 Select a printer icon 2 Select Configure On Screen 3 Click on the Create desktop icon A shortcut method is 1 Move thecursor over the printer icon and press the right mouse button the Quick Menu displays See Quick M enu on page 234 2 Select the Create Desktop Icon The icon appears at the bottom of the screen The icon name includes the machine name and remote printer name 228 Printing Files LPR Setting the Default Printer The default printer prints any print job that is dragged and dropped to the main LPR window The remote machine name and the remote printer name of the default printe
276. ssional for Windows distributes its system setup startup and connection functions into a file located in the TERM Professional install directory This allows for very flexible system and connection configurations DEFAULT TAP This file contains TERM Professional s system configuration and session default settings This file is created and changed by options under the C onfigure menu and should not be modified directly This file is an ASCII text file containing TERM Professional script commands WTERM EX TTPRO EX This file contains custom shutdown commands This file can be created by the user This is an ASCII text file containing TERM Professional script commands TERM Professional for Windows startup outline 1 Load default tapor tap file from thecommand line The command line is used to determine the path name and executable file name that will be used to start a program Additional options may be added after the file name to customize the parameters or the way the program will be started 67 TERM Professional For Windows 3 1 the Command Line can be accessed by selecting the icon to be changed then typing ALT ENTER This will access the Properties for the icon Changes to the Command Line may th n be made For Windows 95 the ALT ENTER option may be used to access the Properties for the icom or right click on the desired icon to change 2 Executewtt rcor wtt32 rcif one exists 3 Load dash options from
277. struct Windows to launch the appropriate application software The extensions and the associated application programs are set up within Windows Run Minimized By checking this box the transfer function screen will be minimized d uring the actual transfer This allows other functions to be performed while the transfer is taking place Display Transfer Status Screen To have the status of the transfer displayed while the information is being transmitted check this box If this box is not checked the information will not be displayed End of Transfer Acknowledge It may be convenient to have TinyTERM display the message that the transfer is complete This may be necessary for transfers that will not be monitored but verification is necessary to assure the actual transfer of the information Automatc Data Compression This box will instruct TinyTERM to compress the files that will be sent or received Even if small files are transferred this box should be checked regardless of the file sizes to make the transfer more efficient Convert Filenames to Uppercase This option only applies when transferring files to UNIX systems If transferring information to a UNIX system this box should be checked Otherwise this box should remain clear 73 TinyTERM Emulator By combining the tools provided in this function it is possible to set up a transfer to automatically transfer or receive the data and launch the required application pro
278. sword optional Server Management NIS host NIS domain name N ew server Remove Server NFS Client Enter the user name for the authentication server Enter the user password for the authentication server This item is also optional If 1NIS Network Information Services should automatically generate a list of valid NFS servers at Windows startup enter the name or IP address of a host Enter the name of the domain that includes the NIS host if one was specified in the field above For example pcx cen com Enter an NFS capable server to add then click Add Server If an N IS host was specified above servers do not need to be added manually N etwork Information Services will automatically generate a list of NFS servers at Windows startup Click the browse button to display a list of available servers entered on the system To remove a server click the server name to be removed then click the Delete Server button After entering the required information click OK to have the information saved and return to the network main screen or click onthe Drive Defaults tab to continue with the setup Drive Defaults The network drive defaults should be entered and maintained using this screen A detailed description of each of the options is given 1A central database used on some UNIX systems for tracking machine names Refer to the UNIX documentation for details specific to the machine used 195 Centu
279. t Select the appropriate setting XON XOFF or RTS CTS The default is RTS CTS Use Flow Control when the speed of the modem and the PC are different e Data Bits The number of bits transmitted at a time Click the appropriate button 7 or 8 The default is 8 if unsure of what this setting should be use 8 e Stop Bits Mark the end of a character in asynchronous communications Click the appropriate button 1 or 2 The default is 1 use 1 if not sure what the setting should be 152 Setting up the Dialer Parity Adds abit to each transmitted character When using even parity the bit s value is either 0 or 1 to make the total number ones in the character even When using odd parity the bit s value is either 0 or 1 to make the total number of ones in the character odd Click the appropriate button Even Odd Mark Space or N one The default is N one use N one if not sure what this setting should be Auto disconnect timeout Specifies the timein seconds during which no data has been sent or received after which the Dialer hangs up Enter the desired waiting time in seconds The default is 900 seconds Zero 0 means never disconnect This prevents accidentally keeping along distance connection if the user is distracted Dialing Timeout Specifies the number of seconds that the modem waits after dialing for a connection to be established If the modem doesn t connect in that number of seconds the Dialer hangs up and r
280. t decimal values Each decimal value is separated from other values by dots This network address notation is known as a dotted decimal Since each decimal digit represents 8 binary digits the maximum dotted decimal value is 255 The following is an example of a dotted decimal IP address 192 86 85 4 Address Classes The following network classes are used to group networks according to the number of hosts on the network 187 Century TCP Table 1 Network Class Listing Network Class Number of Hosts Class C Can contain up to 254 hosts Class D Used to identify a group of computers all at one time multicast addresses Class E Reserved Each of the five network classes A E is described on pages 188 through 189 Class A Networks Asshown below class A networks use 7 bits to define the network and 24 bits to define the hosts The uppermost bit is always 0 This allows 128 class A networks Table 2 Class A Networks Address Range Status 127 0 0 0 Reserved Class B Networks As shown below class B networks use the uppermost 2 bits as 1 0 the next 14 bits define the network and the last 16 bits define the hosts This allows up to 16 384 class B networks Table 3 Class B Networks Address Range Status 128 0 0 0 Reserved 128 1 0 0 through 191 254 0 0 Available 191 255 0 0 Reserved 188 N etwork Addresses Class C Networks As shown in the following table class C networks use the uppermost
281. t drivers Table 1IBM LAN Support Drivers Driver Name Description DXMGOMOD SYS PC Network amp Baseband adapter support DXMG1MOD SYS 3270 Workstation support DXMG2MOD SYS Orginial PC Network adapter support DXMTOMOD SYS NETBIOS driver E O N CF Y required command line options DXMJOMOD SYS NETBEIU NDIS Driver no IEEE 802 2 171 Century TCP The DXMEOM OD SYS D XM TOM OD SYScombination and DXMJOMOD SYSare mutually exclusive DXMTOMOD SYSand DXMJOMOD SYSboth provide NETBEIU support When the IBM LAN Support is used with the N DIS network card drivers certain parameters are mandatory on the IBM LAN Support DXM driver lines The following entries are sample config sys autoexec bat and protocol ini entries for Century TCP and IBM LAN Support Century TCP NDIS and IBM LAN Support NETBIOS CONFIG SYS DEVICE C CENTURY PROTMAN DOS C CENTURY DEVICE C NDIX_DRIVER DOS DEVICE C LSP DXMAOMOD SYS 001 DEVICE C LSP DXMJOMOD SYS DEVICE C CENTURY MAR_NDIS DOS The 001 DXMAOMOD SYS parameter defines U S English as the language for load time messages The ND IS_DRIVER DOSis replaced with the network card driver AUTOEXEC BAT C CENTURY NETBIND COM PATH C CENTURY PATH PROTOCOL INI PROTMAN_MOD DRIVERNAME PROTMAN DXMAIDXCFG DXMJOMOD_NIF NETBEIU BINDINGS NETWORK_CARD ETHERAND_ TYPE D CHAINX5C 1 NETWORK_CARD DRIVERNAME DRIVER MAR_NDIS DRIVERNAME MAR_NDI BINDINGS NETWORK_CA
282. t through cable no handshaking can occur To get around the handshaking problem a null modem cable can cross some of the control lines as well as the data lines Serial and M odem Connections Figure 4 Basic DTE Null Modem Handshaking lt This allows DTR pin 20 on each DTE interface to drive both DSR pin 6 and pin 8 DCD on the other Whenever either side asserts DTR the other side thinks it s getting DSR and DCD Some publications suggest that pins 4 and 5 can be fakedit by tying them together at each end of the cable As a result whenever the computer looks for a go ahead signal it gets it from itself This is really a poor practice It will generally work if simply connecting terminals since people can t type fast enough to ever overload the computer For direct connections with dependable flow control always connect pins 4 and 5 crossed so that the two DTE interfaces will converse correctly unless of course one of the two computers has a DCE interface in which case the cable should be straight through Here s the pinning for a full null modem cable Figure 5 25 Pin Null Modem Cable ee ee This should only be done for a null modem cable since a modem really does require the DTR DCD handshaking signals If using a cable like this with a modem it will not know to hang up when the computer closes the port and drops de asserts DTR TERM Professional 9 100 Like all generalities the
283. tains the following components Trash The trash bin is used to erase an existing PC key s mapping by dragging the PC key and dropping it into the trash bin Show Map The Show Map button is used to invoke the Dialog Box Interface of the Kl yayqzard PC Keyboard The PC keyboard displayed is an image of your actual keyboardeyfacb is shown in a different color depending on the mapping The modifier keys sii ftor Ctrl are yelow The state of the modifier keys can be toggled by just clicking on the modifier key The remaining keys are either red or black red keys are unmapped while black keys are mapped A mapped key will show the Protocol key to which it is mapped When the mouse cursor is over a mapped key the status bar indicates the Protocol key which is mapped to that PC key You can alsainmap an existing mapping by using the drag and drop feature Protocol Keyboard The Protocol keyboard displayed is an image of the actual Protocol keyb amp aydacElie shown in various colors The keys are either blue or maroon Protocol keys which are blue can be mapped to a PC key Protocol keys which are maroon cannot be mapped to a PC key Status Bar The status bar displays detailed mapping information 1 When moving the mouse cursor over a Protocol key the statuswarttle Protocol key 2 When moving the mouse cursor over a PC key the status bar shows the PC key including any modifier keys such adt or Shif as well as its current mapping
284. tains the following components Trash The trash bin is used to erase an existing PC key s mapping by dragging the PC key and dropping it into the trash bin Show Map The Show Map button is used to invoke the Dialog Box Interface of the Kl yayqaard PC Keyboard The PC keyboard displayed is an image of your actual keyboardeyfacb is shown in a different color depending on the mapping The modifier keys sii ftor Ctrl are yellow The state of the modifier keys can be toggled by just clicking on the modifier key The remaining keys are either red or black red keys are unmapped while black keys are mapped A mapped key will show the Protocol key to which it is mapped When the mouse cursor is over a mapped key the status bar indicates the Protocol key which is mapped to that PC key You can alsainmap an existing mapping by using the drag and drop feature Protocol Keyboard The Protocol keyboard displayed is an image of the actual Protocol keyb aydacBhe shown in various colors The keys are either blue or maroon Protocol keys which are blue can be mapped to a PC key Protocol keys which are maroon cannot be mapped to a PC key Status Bar The status bar displays detailed mapping information 1 When moving the mouse cursor over a Protocol key the status bar shows the Protocol key 2 When moving the mouse cursor over a PC key the status bar shows the PC key including any modifier keys such adt or Shif as well as its current mapping
285. tallation see the Installation section in this manual N etwork Connections When Century TCP was installed an existing HOSTS file was searched for and created if one was not found Thetitle bar for the Century TCP configuration utility designates the hosts file location when the Configure Hosts File tab is selected The Configure Hosts File tab allows the addition of host names as well as the changing deletion or sorting of host file entries Clicking Undo cancels any changes made to the H osts file since the changes were last saved Adding a Hosts File To create a H osts file or add entries to the existing file 1 After double clicking on the Century TCP icon select Configure Hosts File Enter a host TCP IP address in the Host IP Address box Enter the primary host name for the machinein the Host Name box Enter an alias name for the host in the Alias box optional Enter a description of the host in the Comment box optional Click Add The fileinformation is added tothe Host File Entries listbox Repeat steps 2 6 to add additional hosts OO beh O OS cae 0s ATS Select File Save Changes To use an existing Hosts filewith Century TCP that was not selected during installation copy or move the HOSTS file to the directory specified inthe Century TCP configuration utility title bar By default this directory is C CENTURY ETC Changing a Hosts File To change existing information about a host 1 After
286. tch the selected keyboard type TheOK button Click this button to exit the keyboard mapper If keyboard settings have been changed a message will be displayed asking if the new settings should be saved Clickes to save settingsNo to discard settings oCancel to return to the editor 53 TERM Professional Emulator If keyboard settings have been changed the message will be displayed asking if the new settings should take effect immediately Click thes button to have the settings take effect immediatelo to maintain the current keyboard settings o ancel to return to the editor e The Cancel button Click this button to exit the keyboard editor and discard all changes e The Chart button Clicking this button opens the TCS chart Figure 16 TERM Professional TCS Chart Dialog Box Century Unicode Table One Characters from the chart can be dragged to the keyboard editor and dropped on a key to remap the key value Each page of the TCS chart can be viewed by clicking the buttons labeled 1 2 3 and 4 on the right side of the chart The TERM Professional Functions chart can be displayed by clicking the F button TERM Professional functions can be dragged from this chart to any key in the keyboard editor Figure 17 TERM Professional Function Chart Dialog Box Keyboard Meta Functions ABORT GOLD CAPTURE PRINT COMPOSE NEXTSESS SCRLEFT J SCARIGHT SCANMODE BREAK SCRLINEUP SCRLINEDN SCRPAGEUP SCRPA
287. te such as bolding and they display information You can t enter information in this type of field Protected N on Highlighted Fieldsdisplay standard text without any special attribute such as bolding You can t enter information in this type of field Non Protected Highlighted Fieldslet you enter text and display the text with special attributes such as bolding Default Screen Colorsare displayed when a TN 3270 connection is not yet established or when connected with TTY mode enabled Blue Red Pink Green Turquoise Yellow Black and Whitecan be altered to display different colors when an extended attributes color comes across during a TN 3270 session Colors that havea field name and colors that havea standard color name havea foreground color and a background color The Foreground C distbox defines the foreground color and the Background Colorlistbox defines the background color The default background color often overrides the background setting for a particular style or color so you may not see the background color change Examples If you click the following options protected non highlighted text will be white with a blue background Protected Non Highlighted in the Available Flastisox W hite in the Foreground Colbstbox Dark Bluein the Background C oltatbox If you click the following options blue text will be yellow with a blue background Blue in the Available Fielldstbox Yellow in the Foreground C ollestbox Dark B
288. th the same IRQ one must be changed To change the IRQ on one of the active ports fe ee UEP E Setting up the Dialer Open the Windows Control Panel and select the port to be tested Click Settings Click Advanced Change the IRQ field to resolve the conflict 167 Using M ultipleN etwork Protocols Using Multiple Network Protocols Introduction Artisoft LANtastic and Century TCP Banyan VINES and Century TCP IBM LAN Support with Century TCP Microsoft LAN Manager and Century TCP Novell NetWare and Century TCP Troubleshooting Introduction Although Century TCP uses the TCP IP network protocol it can also coexist simultaneously with other non TCP IP network protocols This section discusses some of the popular network protocols and how they can work together with Century TCP The examples show Century TCP and the example network in a Windows 3 1 or Windows for Workgroups environment when the Windows for Workgroups network is not active For information concerning TCP IP on Windows 95 refer to the Windows documentation Artisoft LANtastic and Century TCP Century TCP and LAN tastic can work simultaneously on the PC network adapter via N DIS network card drivers Only certain versions of LAN tastic however support NDIS drivers If the PC is running LAN tastic version 4 1 or below the current LAN tastic version must be installed In order to run LAN tastic over N DIS Artisoft s AI NDIS EXENDIS compatible p
289. the User name as known on the server machine usually the user login name Select Set Password The Enter N ew Password dialog displays Enter the correct password in New Passwordand Confirm Password Click OK Changing The Password To change the default password 1 7 Select Control Panel Network or Control Panel Network PC NFS on a Windows for Workgroups network The Century NFS Network Configuration dialog displays Select Drives Click Change The Century NFS Enter N ew Password dialog displays Enter the old password in Old Password Enter the new password in New Password Enter the new password againin Confirm New Password Click OK Sharing Files With DOS 3 1 File Sharing Capability Century NFS supports DOS 3 1 file sharing File sharing provides the ability to create a file on a network drive from the PC and allow access to the file similar to File Locking for Windows 201 Century NFS To set the default values to share files created on a network drive 1 Select Control Panel Network or Control Panel Network PC NFSon a Windows for Workgroups network The Century NFS Network Configuration dialog displays 2 Select Drives 3 Select Sharing 4 Click OK Restoring The Drive Connection at Startup If network drives are changed often they should probably not be restored at Windows startup However if network drives are mapped and are not changed very often it is easier to have th
290. the command line into memory The following isa list of available command lines and their function Table 1 Command Line Options Command Function Open the specified port for communications For example 1COM1 s baudstring Set the communications parameters specified by baudstring Baudstringis a comma separated list of the baud rate parity wordlength stopbits in that order If only the baud rate is specified the remaining parameters will be set to their setup values h Use half duplex mode u O mit startup banner Z Connect to N UL driver V Emulate DEC VT100 1 Set transfer protocol to WTERM CRC 2 Set transfer protocol to ZMODEM 7 Set transfer protocol to XMODEM 4 Execute the Script file from the command line if specified 5 Establish a connection from thdapfile and dash options information 6 Execute the AUTOCMD script from th ap file if one exists TERM Professional shutdown outline 1 Execute theW TERM EX TTPRO EXfile if one exists 2 Close sessions and user interface TERM Professional 3 Close capture and print files 4 Exit to the operating system Keyboard Remapping Keyboardremapping is a process that allows the changing of the values that a key sends Keys on a terminal s keyboard send escape and control sequences so that programs can correctly interpret the key that has been pressed Remapping a key means that if the F1 key sends EOP Escape letter O letter P it c
291. the communications settings of the default tap file or a custom tap file TERM Professional Emulator e Emulate Configure the emulation settings of the default tap file or a custom tap file e Printer Configure the printer settings e Keyb Configure the keyboard settings e Color Configure the color settings e Help Access the on line H elp system e Exit Exits TERM Professional Session Bar The Session Bar controls and displays information on all TERM Professional sessions Figure 4 TERM Professional s Session Bar Default Configuration F fnew The current connection s description is shown inside a large tab Background sessions and the new session option are shown within small tabs Click on any tab to change to that session or click on new to establish another concurrent session Control Menu The Control M enu is a pull down menu that is displayed in the upper left hand corner of the TERM Professional window and controls moving resizing maximizing minimizing and closing the TERM Professional window Click on theConirol Menu button in the upper left hand corner or press ALT SPACEBARto open this pull down menu The selections on the Control M enu may be accessed in one of three ways click on the selection use thea LT keys if available or type the underlined letteALT key combinations allow access to th ontrol M enuoptions without opening the window first 21 TERM Professional Emulator Ta
292. the number of seconds to wait before attempting the connection again and dialogue prompts during the login sequence 1 From the Login Setup dialog box click thedit button The Advanced Login Setup dialog box will be displayed Figure 22 TERM Professional Advanced Login Setup Dialog Box D rt String be Edi F Leow C Legat C Gtoteewver C Siopao GE Bist Seed m Howy 3 timos wai 5 seconds pex seti Caw wai Fo hon Thos Sead WN Wait For Porrmoed Thee Seed wr watro Moa wot For Thee Seed Options available include 61 62 TERM Professional Emulator Dialog String to Edit These radio buttons determine which string within the chosen scheme to edit TERM Professional Emulator e FirstSend This is a connection initialization string Some systems may require a carriage return or break sequence before they respond with alogin Place any preliminary transmissions in this field e Retryn times n is the number of ttmed ERM Professionakttempts to log in before reporting a login failure e Waitn seconds per retry This is the numberof seconds to wait for each Wait For string before timing out and beginning the next retry e Wait For Then Send These are paired fields that conduct a dialogue with a remote system during auto login Generally the user must wait for the login string from the remote system and reply with the username and repeat the same sequence ofwaiting and answering for the passwordl ERM
293. the script will need to be entered in this space If the pathname is not known for the desired script press the Browse button to determine the correct name Show M enu This checkbox selects whether tdisplay the menu bar Cbhcked will show the menu bar Unchecked hides the menu bar 71 TERM Professional Emulator e Show Ribbon Bar This checkbox selects whether tdisplay the ribbon bar C amp cked will show the ribbon bar Unchecked hides the ribbon har e Show Session Bar This checkbox selects whether tdisplay the session bar Cbcked will show the session bar Unchecked hides the session har e Display Splash This checkbox selects whether tdisplay the splash screen on startup Checked willshow the splash screen Unchecked suppresses the splash screen e Log Transfers This checkbox selects whether to automatically log the results of all file transfers Checked will automatically log file transfers as they are performed e Display Error Boxes Selects whether to display error boxes when errors occur If checked error boxes will display for user interaction If uncheckedrors will be reported on the terminal screen e Save When Exiting If the settings should be saved without a prompt when exiting click the Always radio button If the settings should never be saved when exiting TERM click the N ever radio button If the option should be given when exiting TERM to save the entered settings click the Prompt radio butto
294. the time you want to only add 1 stop bit here so that you can maximize your efficiency However if you have an extremely slow modem you may need to increase the number to 1 5 or 2 so that the end of the character can be recognized Here are the bits one character is normally composed of Start Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P Stop Bit s One character a data byte Saving a Profile You may save the currently loaded profile to a new name by clicking on the Save As item in the File menu You will be prompted to enter a new name or select an existing profile name from listbox provided Using Save As in this mannecopies the currently loaded profile You may also use Save As to create anew profile After you have made changes to the current profile s settings select Save As from the File menu and enter a name for the new profile Select Save from the File menu to save the currently loaded profile with its current name Deleting a Profile You may delete an existing profile by selecting its name from thstbox provided If you choose to delete the currently loaded profile the factory default settings will be loaded after the deletion You can t delete a profile that is in use by another instance of the application Opening a Profile You may load an existing profile by selecting its name from thetbox displayed All configuration parameter settings associated with this profile are automatically loaded Creating a New Profile Select the File New
295. ting with a system that cannot handle input at the full baud rate speed set this value higher e XON Character This edit field will accept the numeric ASCII value for the software flow control character XON The default value XON 7S is usual and normal for asynchronous communications e XOFF Character This edit fieldwill accept the numeric ASCII value for the software flow control character XO FF The default value XO FF 9Q is usual and normal for asynchronous communications 5 To accept the new settings pres amp NTER Or click on the OK Button To reject the new settings pressSC Or click on the Cancel Button Changing Modem Settings Windows 3 1 NT3 5 Only SelectConfigure Modem TheM odem Profile Setupdialog box is displayed TERM Professional Emulator Figure 11 TERM Professional Modem Profile Setup Dialog Box Modem Profile Setup x T Modem Settings Detect Max Baud 2400 M Auto Baud Connect _Detect_ Flow Control xon 7XOFF M X Drop DTR to Hangup _ test Ea Modem Profile T E bettie Char Send Delay 0 milliseconds Save As eee Advanced Dialer Settings Redial attempts 2 No Answer Timeout 60 Redial Pause 0 Leave DTR on at Exit In the Modem Profile pop up field select the modem name which matches the modem in use If no modem name in the list matches the modem type select the closest match Generic Hayes Compatible will work for most Hayes compatibl
296. tions displays Select a filter from the Filter options list box Click OK uo Pw N Changing the Spool Directory If the spool directory is changed LPR automatically changesthe Control Panel Printers Connect Portsvalue to reflect the new directory Any previously configured printers will still be connected to the previous spool directory To connect them to the new directory follow thestepsin Printing from within an Application on page 231 Deleting the Spool Directory If printing from an Microsoft Windows application to the LPR printer is no longer needed the directory entry in Directory for spooled files may be deleted To delete the directory entry in Directory for spooled files highlight the entry and press Delete then press Enter Deleting the directory entry removes the printer attached to that portin Control Panel Printers Installed Printers To notify the user before the printer is removed LPR displays a warning dialog The dialog allows an entry in Control Panel Printers and connect the printer to another port saving that printer as the installed printer Changing the Printer Queue Status Window Font Only fixed width fonts will be displayed The font may be changed the font style and the font size of the Printer Queue Status window To change the font select Options Status Font The following dialog is then displayed 237 Printing Files LPR Figure 3 LPR Font Dialog Font
297. to the application e Follow the application s directions to jihiatext Print Setup Select this item if you want to set up your printer You see the Windows Printer Configuration dialog box where you may set options such as the printer the printer s properties the paper size and the text orientation portrait or landscape Exit Click on this item to disconnect from the remote host arfdoenithe TN 5250 application Edit Menu On the Edit Menu you have the following choices Copy This item copies selected text to the clipboard Paste This item pastes the text on the clipboard into the Telnet session text is sent to the remote host as if the user had typed the characters from the keyboard Select Screen Click on this item to select all text in the active screen i e the 24 or more lines visible when the application is maximized Connect Options Connect Click on this option to connect to a remote host using TN 5250 You can load a profile by selecting its name from the list of profiles available or you can use the Default profile You are usually given a login prompt for the remote machine once the connection is made Connect also acts as a toggle Once you are in a session the Connect option displays as Disconnect allowing you to end a session with one host but remain in the application to establish a session with a different host Because it is good practice to log off properly from host sessions you are prompte
298. to the minimum value identified in the SPACE min max statement Maximum Space Size This refers to the maximum value identified in the SPACE min max statement Cancel Click this button to stop a file transfer Host Options Tab Click File Transfer Then click the host O ptiontcalefine values for transferring files to the IBM mainframes using IND FILE Keep in mind that you must first be connected to a remote host before you can transfer files Host System Choose your IBM mainframe s operating system CMS TSO CICS Host Transfer Command This is the command used to transfer files from your PC to the IBM mainframe The default is IND FILE Additional Command Options This provides additional arguments for the IN D FILE command Host Timeout This is the number of seconds the TN 3270 emulator waits for the host to respond while the file transfer is in progress Verify Host Screen Checking this option verifies that the host screen is in a valid state before a file transfer begins Cancel Click this button to stop a file transfer Edit Menu Copy This item copies selected text to the clipboard Paste This item pastes the text on the clipboard into the Telnet session text is sent to the remote host as if the user had typed the characters from the keyboard While pasting is in progress the Paste item in the Edit menuthanges to Abort paste which may be used to terminate the paste process Select Screen Click
299. tp XENIX NET nodename Rcv 006 LAN User Send Vtp M anager nodename Rcv 006 MSNET User None nodename OpenNETA User Rev iVTS nodename Send iPC1 MT Send NUL Novell NetWare for UNIX or SCO IPX SPX 104 Novell NetWare for UNIX or SCO IPX SPX networks require IPX software to be installed on aU NIX server Onl ovellN etWare needs to be installed on the PC Once the software is installed ERM Professionalwill access the network if NOVELL NVT has been selected in the Port Selection field In addition to running etWare it is necessary to have the filew ipxspx dll installed in the Windows directory the fildpx 386in the Windows SYSTEM directory and the following entry in thsystem inifile 386 Enh network vipx 386 Network Connections Windows Sockets TERM Professionaffor Windows supports connecting to a network through the standard Windows Sockets A PiWinsock API orWinsock Use ofWinsock requires that thew insock dllof the target network be installed This usually includes modification of the PATH statement in taetoexec batfile or installing thew insock dllin the Windows or Windows SYSTEM directory The install program of thaVinsock compatible package should handle this Connect to the network from ERM Professionaby selectingWinsock from the Port Selection field 105 Character Sets Character Sets n This Section DEC Multinational Character Set National Replacement Ch
300. tting Procedure Subnets are created by partitioning the host field of the network address Each partition of the host field defines a subnet For example Class C networks use the last 8 bits to define the host To divide this network into two subnets with an equal number of addresses in each 1 bit of the host field is used since 1 bit takes on 2 different values and 2 partitions are needed When the subnet bit value changes a different partition of hosts is referenced The broadcast address differs for each subnet thus broadcasts only reach those hosts in the subnet H ere are some subnet examples Table 6 Subnets Network Subnet Subnet Bits Broadcast Partitions Address 192 86 85 0 0 192 86 85 255 192 86 85 0 2 1 when 0 192 86 85 0 through 192 86 85 127 192 86 85 127 when 1 192 86 85 128 through 192 86 85 255 192 86 85 255 192 86 85 0 8 3 when 000 192 86 85 0 through 192 86 85 31 192 86 85 31 when 001 192 86 85 32 through 192 86 85 63 192 86 85 63 when 010 192 86 85 64 through 192 86 85 95 192 86 85 95 when 011 192 86 85 96 through 192 86 85 127 192 86 85 127 when 100 192 86 85 128 through 192 86 85 159 192 86 85 159 when 101 192 86 85 160 through 192 86 85 191 192 86 85 191 when 111 192 86 85 192 through 192 86 85 223 192 86 85 223 when 111 192 86 85 224 through 192 86 85 255 192 86 85 255 190 N etwork Addresses Subnet Masks Subnet partitions are identified to the network software by the subnet mask The subnet
301. tual circuits configuration Sed irtual Circuits Configuratiofor more information MSNET M SN et is Microsoft s network interface Select MS NetworRgenNET A or OpenNET B in the Port Selection fieldO penNET A andO penNET B areM SN et interfaces with different virtual circuit configurations S amp etual Circuits Configuratiornfor more information Virtual Circuits Configuration Under Windows the following settings can be changed frafonfigure Communications Advanced In order to maintain maximum compatibility withetBIO S andM SN et based networks TERM Professionasbupports the ability to change the network port number the virtual terminal name and the handshaking required for the VT server to grant a virtual terminal line WhileTERM Professionabprovides transports for the most commdsetBIOS and M SN et networks the network in use may require changes to the virtual circuits configuration The NETPORT command The NETPORT command sets the 16th character of t ketBIO SM SN et name This is required in order to be granted a terminal server line The NETPORT command is used as follows NETPORTnumber number This is the numeric digit equal to the ASCII value of the requested port number 101 TERM Professional The NETVTNAME command The NETVTNAME command controls the creation of the virtual terminal server name from the name passed t ERM Professional This is required in order to be granted a terminal server line The NETVTNA
302. type their user id name and the correct password to gain access to the system 149 Century TCP Set Login Parameters Click this option to set the username and password that is appropriate for the host or Internet system e Network Settings These settings are only available if a network connection type is selected If the proper response to these settings is not known contact the System Administrator or the Internet Provider e Domain Name Domain Name Server s H ost IP Address Enter the domain name consisting of a sequence of names separated by periods For example pcx cen com e Domain Name Server IP Address Enter the DNS Host IP Address For example 192 99 77 160 e Local IP Address IP address for the local machine Click Use Static Local then enter the IP address if the address provided is static never changing Settings on the Modem Tab The M odem tab allows the selection or definition of the modem type initialization strings the specification of a direct serial connection without a modem as well as specification of aPCMCIA modem Each option is described in detail e Modem Type Click to select a modem type from the drop down list If unsure of the type of modem in use check the modem documentation If the documentation is unavailable select generic Hayes compatible To define a modem not displayed on the list click Add to display the Adding a M odem dialog e Modem Control Strings Standard modem command str
303. und doc New DOS name LOST_FOU DOC 209 N etwork Applications Once the file names are translated if two or more files have the same name FTP replaces the duplicate extensions with unique numbers 000 001 002 etc Example e Original long names status report_april status report_may status report_june e New DOS names STATUS REP STATUS 000 STATUS 001 Using a Host List File A list file may be set up containing host names and IP addresses to simplify host selection By entering the host name and the IP address a host may be selected from the list without having the network name services convert the host name into an IP address If aHOSTS file has already been set up for the PC network software it may be used as the basis for the FTP host list If there is not an existing HOSTS file one can be built using FTP s Edit Known Hosts command The rest of this section explains how to build a new host list file or load an existing HOSTS file Building a New Host List File 1 From the menus select Session Edit Known Hosts 210 Century FTP Figure 2 Main Window Edit Known Hosts Century FTP Edit Known Hosts x Hostname Host IP Lookup Description f __AddNewEnty Update Eristina Enty ___ClearAllFields Current List Master List Jelete re IVE Moy A View and Sort by Hostname gt Hostname Load File Save File Help Cox Cancel 2 Enter the following e Hostnam
304. und in each respective dialog box For a complete list of settings that can be saved as a part of the profile see Profiles Transfer Click this option to transfer files between your PC and the BM mainframe The following tabs display File Transfer tab Send Options tab Host Options tab Print Click this option to print the currently displayed screen of information Printer Setup Click this option to choose or configure a printer Exit Click on this item to disconnect from the remote host arfdoenithe TN 3270 application File Transfer Tab Click File Transfer Then click the File Transfert adisansfer files between your PC and an IBM mainframe Keep in mind that you must first be connected to a remote host before you can transfer files Before you transfer a file make any changes needed in the Host O ptions tab Select File Local This is the filename on your PC Either enter the filename manually or click the Browse button to choose a path and filename Remote This is the name of the file on your IBM mainframe Typein the file name Options Choose from the following options EBCDIC lt gt ASCII When you click this option an EBCDIC to ASCII conversion occurs when your PC is receiving files When your PC is sending files an ASCII to EBCDIC conversion occurs This option is most commonly used for sending and receiving text files CR LF Conversion This option controls the conversion of Carriage Return Line Feeds at th
305. urer All that is standard is the function of each of the 25 pins found in the connectors on each end of a serial cable All 25 pins are rarely used Instead different pieces of equipment require different signals to operate To make things even more complicated connectors with only 9 pins are becoming increasingly common In this section an assumption is made of using a standard 25 pin connector The pinouts for the 9 pin connector used on the IBM PC AT are listed later in the section If all of the equipment is purchased from a single manufacturer the exact cables needed to connect the various pieces should also be available from this source If the hardware is mix and match the cables will probably have to be built internally Serial and M odem Connections For more authoritative treatments of RS 232 and serial communications in general we recommend echnical Aspects of Data Communicatioisy John McN amara D igital Press 1982 and Programmer s Guide to Data Communicationsdy Joe Campbell ams 1987 RS 232 signals M any of the signals defined by the RS 232 standard are rarely used The following table lists the signals that are important for the present purposes Table 4 RS 232 Signals Pin Function Direction DTE DCE Frame G round ulalwl ye Oe US ae Ue ete Data Set Ready DSR Signal Ground GND D ata Carrier Detect DCD Data Terminal Ready DTR 22 Ring Indicator RI olla TIT y T Data tra
306. ury TCP Century TCP and NetWare can coexist when N etW are uses the Open Data Link Interface ODI protocol to access the network adapter In non ODI environments the NetWare protocol and driver for the specific network adapter are combined into ipx com In ODI environments ipx com is replaced by e A NetWare protocol module that is not tied to one specific network adapter ipxodi com e AnODI network adapter driver represented by ODI_ DRV COM in the example on the following page e A Link Support Layer Isl com that sends and receives N etWare and non N etW are network information For Century TCP to install and use ODI the PC must be running ODI during the Century TCP installation Century TCP detects the ODI installation and edits autoexec bat and net cfg accordingly AUTOEXEC BAT C path LSL COM C path ODI_DRV COM C CENTURYKMAR_ODI COM 0x60 C path IPXODI COM C path NETX EXE The command line option for MAR_ODI COM designated as CENTURY in this example is determined by the type of network data Frame used on the PC as designated in the net cfg file Run MAR_ODI COM without any options to display the list of available options This Frame type is added to the net cfg file if the file does not already contain the type C path NET CFG Link Driver ODL DRV Frame Ethernet_802 3 Frame Ethernet_ll Frame Ethernet_802 2 Frame Ethernet_SNAP 176 Using M ultipleN etwork Protocols Link Support Buffers 12 1575
307. ury TCP NDIS and IBM LAN Support IEEE 802 2 CONFIG SYS DEVICE C CENTURY PROTMAN DOS C CENTURY DEVICE C INDIS_DRIVER DOS DEVICE C LSP DXMAOMOD SYS 001 DEVICE C LSP DXMEOMOD SYS_ 12 1 DEVICE C CENTURY MAR_NDIS DOS Table 3IBM LAN Support Parameter Listing Driver Parameter Purpose DXMAOMOD SYS 001 Defines U S English as the language for load time messages DXMEOMOD SYS_ 12 Gives a 12KB work space for the network card adapter 1 Transmits Ethernet DIX Version 2 0 frames with swapped address bits NDIS_DRIVER DOSis replaced with the network card driver name 174 Using M ultipleN etwork Protocols AUTOEXEC BAT C SCENTURY NETBIND COM PATH C CENTURY PATH PROTOCOL INI PROTMAN_ MOD DRIVERNAME PROTMAN DXMAIDXCFG DXMEO_NIF DXMEO NIF DXMEO_NIF DRIVERNAME DXMEO BINDINGS NETWORK_CARD NETWORK_CARD DRIVERNAME DRIVER MAR NDIS DRIVERNAME MAR_NDI BINDINGS NETWORK_CARD PCXNET_INT 0x60 NETWORK_CARDis replaced with the network card driver name Microsoft LAN Manager and Century TCP Microsoft LAN M anager supports network adapters via N DIS device drivers LAN M anager may implement the N DIS NETBIND functionality via the following call in autoexec bat NET START WORKSTATION If the current version of IAN Manager includea NET START WORKSTATION call remove the entry that Century TCP placed in autoexec bat C CENTURY NETBIND 175 Century TCP Novell NetWare and Cent
308. used to select the current font ftyhe those available for the selected font Size This list box is used to select the width and height of the selected font Sample This box displays a text sample using the currently selected font font style and font size Fit Font to Window Auto Scale This feature allows you to enable automatic scaling of fonts to fit the current TN 5250 window size Note that the automatic scaling featureis only available for fixed width TrueType fonts Auto Scale If you are using a fixed width TrueType font you may also click on the Fit Font to Window button or check the Fit Font to Window box on the Font tab Selecting this item automatically scales text to fit the size of the window in which you are currently working Window Menu Toolbar Clicking this item toggles the display of the toolbar Status Bar Clicking this item toggles the display of the status bar The TN 5250 status bar displays the following e General messages e SYSTEM e MESSAGE e CAPS e NUM e INSERT e ROW e COLUMN 14 General Messages This field on the status bar tells you general messages such as what you are holding your cursor over in the toolbar System This area on the status bar explains the state of the keyboard If S igsp amp dMs here the keyboard is locked You may either be e Waiting for theserver to respond For example perhaps you have sent a Print signal to the printer Until you receive a
309. ute 1A process that monitors other processes running on the system For example the print daemon controls print jobs that have been sent but are waiting in line to actually print 218 NFS Server privileges from the User UID If the UID entered for the user does not allow privileges to the files specified to transfer the transfer will not complete Group Type the Group name or select the correct group for the user from the pull down list The group the user is assigned to will be used in conjunction with the actual user name to determine read write and execute privileges Secondary Groups The user may be assigned to Secondary Groups to allow additional permissions for the individual Implement Secondary Groups by selecting the Change button Highlight the desired Secondary Group from the list displayed and click on the Accept button Setup Groups Groups must be set up prior to setting up users The group name and group ID entered in this option will be used when transferring information to determine the privileges allowed to users assigned to the group Select Options Setup Groups from the NFS Server M ain Screen Group Name Type the group name to be added changed or removed If the group name entered should be removed click onthe Remove button Group ID Type the Group ID for the name entered The group ID entered will determine file privileges allowed to users assigned to this group The group ID should be consistent w
310. uto Answer OFF ATSO 0 M No Dialtone NO DIALTONE All of the Command Strings and Result Strings can be customized to fit the requirements of the modem Command Strings e Initialization The string of modem commands sent to the modem before the connect attempt e Dial Prefix The string sent to the modem before the phone number to be dialed For Hayes modems the string is ATDT e Dial Suffix The string to be sent immediately following the phone number For Hayes modems it is a carriage return 49 TERM Professional Emulator e Hang up The string required to hang up your modem For H ayes modems it is ATHZ TERM Professional Emulator Off H ook The string required to force the modem to go off hook For H ayes modems itis ATA followed by a carriage return Escape The string required to place the modem into command mode For Hayes modems itis Auto Answer ON The string required to set the modem to automatically answer incoming calls For Hayes modems it is A TSO 1 followed by a carriage return Auto Answer OFF The string to disable the modem from automatically answering incoming calls For Hayes modems it is A TSO 0 followed by a carriage return Result Strings Connect The string response received from the modem when a connection is established For Hayes modems itis CONNECT Auto Connect The string received from the modem when a connection is established at baud OK The string
311. way optional Optional The gateway used when the IP address entered above is not on the local network Note Complete this option only if the network has a gateway Advanced Optional The Subnet Mask and Broadcast Address for this PC Note Change these options only if the network is divided into subnets UseDHCP Configuration information exists on aD HCP server This method requires that the System Administrator set up a machine to run the DHCP server Once set up the DHCP server provides configuration information to the TCP stack e UseBOOTP Configuration information is matched with IP addresses on a BO OTP server This method requires that the System Administrator set up a machine to run the BOOTP server Once set up the BOOTP server provides configuration information to the TCP Stack Select the method to be used by the TCP Stack t resolve machine names 12 A connection between one network and another usually networks of different types 13M achines running TCP IP are known by an IP Internet Protocol address 192 43 45 133 and a machine name PC_10 M achine names are easy for people to remember but the network needs to know the IP address The two ways of making this association is with DNS Domain Name Server or HOSTS files Try DNS first then HOSTS TERM Professionainstructs the4D NS server to resolve the machine name If not found7ERM Professionakhen searches a5H O STS file for the name e Try HOS
312. when the cursor changes to the drop state The status bar also indicates whether a drop is permissible or not For more information s nmapping an existing mapping Erasing an Existing Mapping You can delete the current mapping of any PC key A PC key which does not have any mapping cannot be unmapped The steps tainmap the current mapping of a PC key areas follows e Select the modifier state of the PC keyboard as required by simply clicking on the modifiers e g if you want tanmap the PC key lt Shift gt lt F1 gt of your PC keyboard then click on the lt Shift gt key on the PC keyboard e Click with the left mouse button on the desired PC key drag it over the trash bin and drop it in The cursor changes states to indicate whether a drop is possible or not You can t drop as long as the cursor is in a no drop state O You can drop a Protocol key over a PC key only w hen the cursor changes to the drop state The status bar also indicates whether a drop is permissible or not Font Tab Selecting Fonbn the Preferences menu or clicking the Fowiton on the button bar allows you to select the current forfbr your TN 3270 session Note that fixed width TrueType fonts are supported by TN 3270 Font Thislistbox is used to select the current font The recommended font for this product is Courier New If you have problems with characters appearing properly try changing the font Font Style Thislistbox is u
313. x Background Color Click on a color in this list box to identify the background color of the text color selected in the Available Attributes list box You can also create a custom color by selecting Custom from this box and using the Windows custom color dialog Sample This box displays a sample of the selected field showing foreground text against the background window using the color combination currently selected Example If you wanted to make the screen attrigadan reverse have a foreground of blue and a background of red e Selectgreen reverse from the Available Attributes list box e Select blue from the Foreground list box e Select red from the Background list box Styles Tab Click O ptions Preferences Styles talalter the general terminal settings Show Attributes Check this box to physically display special characters representing attributes in the column before every field on the screen There are 32 different kinds of attributes you might see The original hexadecimal values have had 40H added to them to make them printable characters For example the default color green is 20H It is displayed amark Audible Bell If you want to hear a bell when the system sends a signal such as when you are in an error state check this box Block Cursor If you want your cursor to appear as a blinking block that highlights an entire character instead of a blinking underline check this box Profile Settings Tab C
314. ydomd Cede Page 12552 Wisdoms Lasnt AWST T Jam Vidno amp Keybamd Code Pages There are four code page fields that can be changed Transmit Code Page The Code page setting for all communications sent from TERM Professional to the remote host This field should correspond with the code page of the application on the remote host Receive Code Page The Code Page setting for all communications received from a remote host This field should correspond with the code page of the application on the remote host Join Transmit amp Receive Code Pages If checked both transmit and receive code pages will be set to the value of Transmit Code Page If Transmit Code Page is changed both fields will change Video Font Code Page The Code Page used in the video font being used by TERM Professional If this field is changed the font used by TERM Professional will most likely need to be changed to a font based on the selected code page Keyboard Code Page The code page used by the keyboard If a keyboard driver is being used set this field to match the code page used by the keyboard driver Join Video amp Keyboard Code Pages If Checked both Video and Keyboard code pages will be set to the value of Video Font Code Page If Video Font Code Page is changed both fields will change To accept and save the new settings pressNTER Or click on theSave Button To reject the new settings pressSC Or click on theCance Button 65 TE
315. ypted e Scheme name Click on the down arrow to display options This pop up field determines which scheme name is executed e Login at connect This checkbox controls whether TERM Professional for Windows performs an auto login or simply loads the username and password 59 TERM Professional Emulator information If checked the login information will be used every time a connection is made If 3 TERM Professional Emulator unchecked the username password and login type information is stored in memory e View login This checkbox controls whether TERM Professional for Windows displays the login sequences to the screen If checked all login dialog information will be displayed in the emulator window If unchecked TERM Professional for Windows will perform a silent login progress will not be displayed Delete button Removes the currently selected login scheme from the login type database To accept the new settings presSNTER Or click on theOK Button To reject the new settings pressSC Or click on theCancel Button Changing Advanced Login Settings After the basic login settings have been entered the more advanced login settings may be entered This function is designed to be used by more advanced users of TERM Professional to customize the interface between the local and remote machines O ptions included in this window are customized send or initialization strings number of times to retry the connection
316. ze to the next value A lost packet can be viewed as retransmitted data in the Century configuration utMigw Statistics To change the default read write sizes 1 Select Control Panel Network or Control Panel Network PC NFS on a Windows for Workgroups network The Century Network Configuration dialog is displayed 2 Select Drives 3 Select the appropriate size from Read Size and Write Size 4 Click OK Displaying File Names File naming conventions are different for DOS and UNIX operating systems Filenames longer than 8 3 characters that s eight characters plus a three character extension are illegal in DOS Century NFS maps UNIX file names to DOS file names using specific rules See File Name Mapping on page 211 If the DOS 8 3 Files Only option is selected Century NFS only displays DOS files and UNIX files that fit the 8 3 file name convention All other file names are invisible For maximum performance using the DOS 8 3 Files Only option is recommended To set the default values for this option 203 Century NFS 1 Select Control Panel Network or Control Panel Network PC NFS on a Windows for Workgroups network The Century Network Configuration dialog displays 2 Select Drives 3 Select DOS 8 3 Files Only 4 Click OK Securing Files and Directories Century NFS supports two types of file attributes to protect files and directories created on a Century NFS drive permissions and user

Installing TERM Professional

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents